Toshiba 50Hpx95 Owners Manual

50HPX95 42HPX95-50HPX95_E

50HPX95 to the manual 2a1d31b2-2e38-4635-8128-0992b220b519

: Toshiba Toshiba-50Hpx95-Owners-Manual-129210 toshiba-50hpx95-owners-manual-129210 toshiba pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 126

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

OWNER’S MANUAL
Integrated High Definition
Plasma Television

Compatible with the new Toshiba
TM

Audio/Video Hard Drive Recorder!
See pages 26 and 55 for details.

HIGH-DEFINITION TELEVISION

Note: A high definition tuner and programming are required
to view High Definition TV broadcasts. Please contact your
cable or satellite provider.

For an overview of steps for setting up
and using your new TV, see page 10.

42HPX95
50HPX95

Owner’s Record
The model number and serial number are on the back
of your TV. Record these numbers in the spaces below.
Refer to these numbers whenever you communicate
with your Toshiba dealer about this TV.
Model number:
Serial number:

© 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION
All Rights Reserved

#01E_001_4250HPX95

1
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

YC/M

7/12/05, 8:49 AM

23566767

Dear Customer,
Thank you for purchasing this Toshiba Plasma television. This
manual will help you use the many exciting features of your
new Plasma television.
Before operating your Plasma television, please read this
manual completely and keep it nearby for future reference.

Safety Precautions
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE
TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE EFFECTS ON
PLASMA DISPLAY
If a fixed (non-moving) pattern or image remains on the
Plasma display for extended periods of time, the image
can become permanently ingrained in the plasma TV
panel and cause subtle but permanent ghost images.
This type of damage is NOT COVERED BY YOUR
WARRANTY. See pages 4 and 5 for details.

Child Safety
It Makes A Difference
Where Your TV Stands

WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER
SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

Congratulations on your purchase! As you enjoy
your new TV, keep these safety tips in mind:

The Issue

 If you are like most consumers, you have a TV in your home.
Many homes, in fact, have more than one TV.

 The home theater entertainment experience is a growing
trend, and larger TVs are popular purchases; however, they
are not always supported on the proper TV stands.

 Sometimes TVs are improperly secured or inappropriately
situated on dressers, bookcases, shelves, desks, audio
speakers, chests, or carts. As a result, TVs may fall over, causing
unnecessary injury.

WARNING
To prevent injury, this apparatus must be securely attached
to the floor/wall in accordance with the installation
instructions. (See item 19 on page 3.)

WARNING: Always use the Toshiba wall bracket
specified below or another wall bracket approved by
Toshiba for wall mounting this television. The use of any
wall bracket other than the Toshiba wall bracket
specified below or another wall bracket approved by
Toshiba for wall mounting this television could result in
serious bodily injury and/or property damage.
In the U.S.:
Use Toshiba wall bracket model number FWB3250. For
more information, call TACP’s Consumer Solutions
Center at 1-800-631-3811 or visit TACP’s website at
www.tacp.toshiba.com.
In Canada:
Call TCL’s Customer Service Department at 1-800-2683404.

NOTE TO CATV INSTALLERS
This is a reminder to call the CATV system installer’s
attention to Article 820-40 of the U.S. NEC, which provides
guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies
that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding
system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry
as practical. For additional antenna grounding information,
see items 25 and 26 on page 4.

Toshiba Cares!

 The consumer electronics industry is committed
to making home entertainment enjoyable and safe.

 The Consumer Electronics Association formed
the Home Entertainment Support Safety
Committee, comprised of TV and consumer
electronics furniture manufacturers, to advocate
children’s safety and educate consumers and their
families about television safety.

Tune Into Safety

 One size does NOT fit all! Use appropriate furniture large enough to
support the weight of your TV (and other electronic components).

 Use appropriate angle braces, straps, and anchors to secure your
furniture to the wall (but never screw anything directly into the TV).

 Carefully read and understand the other enclosed instructions for
proper use of this product.

 Do not allow children to climb on or play with furniture and TVs.

 Avoid placing any item on top of your TV (such as a VCR, remote
control, or toy) that a curious child may reach for.

 Remember that children can become excited while watching
a program and can potentially push or pull a TV over.

 Share our safety message about this hidden hazard of the home
with your family and friends. Thank you!
2500 Wilson Blvd.
Arlington, VA 22201 U.S.A.
Tel. 703-907-7600 Fax 703-907-7690
www.CE.org
CEA is the Sponsor, Producer and
Manager of the International CES®

2

#01E_002-004_4250HPX95

2
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 8:49 AM

Important Safety Instructions
1)
2)
3)
4)

Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.

5) Do not use this apparatus near water.
6) Clean only with dry cloth.
7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8) Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding type plug. A polarized plug has two blades
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has
two blades and a third grounding prong.
The wide blade or the third prong are
provided for your safety. If the provided
plug does not fit into your outlet, consult
an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10) Protect the power cord from being
walked on or pinched, particularly at
plugs, convenience receptacles, and
the point where they exit from the
apparatus.
11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table specified by the
manufacturer, or sold with the
apparatus. When a cart is used, use
caution when moving the cart/apparatus
combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
13) Unplug this apparatus during
lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of
time.
14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged
in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the
apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain
or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
14a) CAUTION: If the TV is dropped and the cabinet or
enclosure surface has been damaged or the TV does not
operate normally, take the following precautions:
• ALWAYS turn off the TV and unplug the power cord to avoid
possible electric shock or fire.
• To prevent personal injury, never handle the damaged television.
• ALWAYS contact a service technician to inspect the TV any time
it has been damaged or dropped.
15) The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or
splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as
vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.

Installation, Care, and Service
Installation
Follow these recommendations and precautions and heed all
warnings when installing your TV:
16) Never modify this equipment. Changes or modifications
may void: a) the warranty, and b) the user’s authority to
operate this equipment under the rules of the Federal
Communications Commission.
17)

DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL
INJURY, DEATH, OR EQUIPMENT
DAMAGE! Never place the TV on
an unstable cart, stand, or table. The TV
may fall, causing serious personal injury,
death, or serious damage to the TV.

18) Never place items such as vases, aquariums, or candles
on top of the TV.
Sturdy tie
19) Always place the
(as short as possible)
TV on the floor or
a sturdy, level,
stable surface that
Hooks
can support the
weight of the unit.
Band
Use a sturdy tie
between the TV’s
TV side
TV top
rear hook and the
rear wall, pillar, etc., to secure the TV. If you use a TV
stand, fix the TV by using the attached band.

Clip

Screw

20) Never expose the apparatus to dripping or splashing liquid
or place items such as vases, aquariums, any other item
filled with liquid, or candles on top of the TV.
21) Never block or cover the slots
or openings in the TV cabinet
back, bottom, and sides.
Never place the TV:
• on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar
surface;
• too close to drapes, curtains,
or walls; or
• in a confined space such as a bookcase, built-in cabinet,
or any other place with poor ventilation.
The slots and openings are provided to protect the TV from
overheating and to help maintain reliable operation of the
TV. Leave a space of at least 4 inches around the TV.
22) Never allow anything to rest on or roll over the power
cord, and never place the TV where the power cord is
subject to wear or abuse.
23) Never overload wall outlets and extension cords.
24) Always operate the TV with
a 120V AC, 60Hz power source
only.

120V AC

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not
use the polarized plug with an extension cord, receptacle, or
other outlet unless the blades can be inserted completely
with three-wire grounding type to prevent blade exposure.

3

#01E_002-004_4250HPX95

3
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 8:49 AM

Installation (cont. from previous page)

Care (cont. from previous column)

25) Always make sure the antenna system is properly
grounded to provide adequate protection against voltage
surges and built-up static charges (see Section 810 of the
National Electric Code).

30) While it is thundering, do not touch the connecting cables
or apparatus.

Antenna lead-in wire

Antenna discharge unit
(NEC Section 810-20)

Ground clamp

Grounding conductors
(NEC Section 810-21)

Electric service equipment

Power service grounding
electrode system (NEC Art 250 Part H)

Ground clamps

26)

DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL
INJURY OR DEATH!
• Use extreme care to make sure you are never in
a position where your body (or any item you are in contact
with, such as a ladder or screwdriver) can accidentally
touch overhead power lines. Never
locate the antenna near overhead
power lines or other electrical
circuits.
• Never attempt to install any of the
following during lightning activity:
a) an antenna system; or b) cables, wires, or any home
theater component connected to an antenna or phone
system.

31) For added protection of your TV from lightning and power
surges, always unplug the power cord and disconnect the
antenna from the TV if you leave the TV unattended or
unused for long periods of time.
32) During normal use, the TV may make occasional snapping
or popping sounds. This is normal, especially when the
unit is being turned on or off. If these sounds become
frequent or continuous, unplug the power cord and
contact a Toshiba Authorized Service Center.
33) Possible Adverse Effects on Plasma Display
If a fixed (non-moving) pattern or image remains on the
Plasma display for extended periods of time, the image
can become permanently ingrained in the plasma panel of
the TV and cause subtle but permanent ghost images.
This type of damage is NOT COVERED BY YOUR
WARRANTY.
Never leave the Plasma TV on for extended periods of time
while it is displaying the following images or formats:
• Fixed (non-moving) images, including but not limited
to PIP/POP windows, closed captions, video game
patterns, TV station logos, stock tickers, and websites.
• Special formats that do not use
the entire screen, including but not
limited to widescreen or letterbox
format media viewed on a 4:3
aspect ratio display (with gray or
black bars at the top and bottom of the screen) and 4:3
aspect ratio format media viewed on a widescreen/16:9
aspect ratio display (with gray or black bars on the left
and right sides of the screen).

Care
For better performance and safer operation of your TOSHIBA
TV, follow these recommendations and precautions:
27) If you use the TV in the room of 0°C or less, the picture
brightness may vary until the plasma monitor warms up. This
is not a sign of a malfunction.
28) Always unplug the TV before
cleaning.
Wipe the display panel surface
gently using only the supplied
wiping cloth or a soft cloth
(cotton, flannel, etc.). A hard
cloth may damage the surface
of the panel. Avoid contact with alcohol, thinner, benzene,
acidic or and alkaline solvent cleaners, abrasive cleaners,
or chemical cloths, as the surface may be impaired.
29)

WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK!
Never spill liquids or push objects of any kind
into the TV cabinet slots.

Service
34)

WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK!
Never attempt to service the TV yourself. Opening
and removing the covers (except as specified
herein) may expose you to dangerous voltage or other
hazards. Refer all servicing to a Toshiba Authorized Service
Center.

35) If you have the TV serviced:
• Ask the service technician to use only replacement parts
specified by the manufacturer.
• Upon completion of service, ask the service technician to
perform routine safety checks to determine that the TV is
in safe operating condition.
36) When the TV reaches the end of its useful life, ask a
qualified service technician to properly dispose of the TV.

4

#01E_002-004_4250HPX95

4
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 8:50 AM

FCC Declaration of Conformity Compliance Statement (Part 15):
The Toshiba 42HPX95/50HPX95 Plasma Color
Televisions comply with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation.
The party responsible for compliance to these rules is:
Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.
82 Totowa Rd. Wayne, NJ 07470.
Ph: (973) 628-8000
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,

there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined by removing
and applying power to the equipment, the user is encouraged to try
to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and the
receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different
from that to which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician
for help.
CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this equipment not
expressly approved by Toshiba could void the user’s authority to
operate this equipment.

Important notes about your Plasma TV
The following symptoms are not signs of malfunction,
but rather technical limitations of plasma TV
technology.
1) The display of this Plasma TV radiates infrared rays. It may
affect other infrared communication equipment under
certain operating conditions.
2) Under certain conditions, the display of this Plasma TV
may cause interference with the audio and/or video of
certain types of electronic equipment that easily receive
electromagnetic waves (e.g., AM radios and video
equipment). In particular, the display of this Plasma TV
may affect certain types of electronic equipment that are
located beyond the area where the Plasma TV is being
used.
3) The display panel of this Plasma TV is manufactured using
an extremely high level of precision technology. However,
occasionally some parts of the screen may be missing
picture elements and/or have luminous spots.
4) You can enjoy playing video games on this Plasma TV.
However, certain video games that utilize so-called “light
gun” joysticks for shooting at on-screen targets may not
work with this Plasma TV.
5) Possible Adverse Effects on Plasma Display
Like all phosphor-based display devices and all gas-based
plasma displays, the display of this Plasma TV may be
susceptible to permanent ghost images (also known as
phosphor burn-in) under certain circumstances. Certain
operating conditions may accelerate the potential for
phosphor burn-in, including but not limited to the
following:
• Displaying fixed (non-moving) images, including but
not limited to PIP/POP windows, closed captions, video
game patterns, TV station logos, stock tickers, and
websites.

• Displaying special formats that do not use the entire
screen, including but not limited to widescreen or
letterbox format media viewed on a 4:3 aspect ratio
display (with gray or black bars at the top and bottom of
the screen) and 4:3 aspect ratio format media viewed on
a widescreen/16:9 aspect ratio display (with gray or
black bars on the left and right sides of the screen).
To minimize the potential for the occurrence of phosphor
burn-in, Toshiba recommends the following:
• Display a moving image on the display of your Plasma
TV whenever possible.
• Always turn off the power of your Plasma TV when you
are finished using it.
• Reduce the Brightness and Contrast levels as much as
possible without impairing image quality.
• Enable the Long Life settings (see page 95).
• Try to display images that have many colors and color
gradations (i.e., photographic or photo-realistic images).
• Try to display images that have minimal contrast
between light and dark areas (e.g., avoid white
characters on black backgrounds).
• Try to avoid displaying images that have few colors and/
or that have distinct, sharply defined borders between
colors.
About the ISM function
This TV contains an “image sticking minimization” (ISM)
feature that automatically starts to decrease the picture
brightness in small increments when a fixed (non-moving)
image is displayed on-screen for an extended period of time.
This feature helps to reduce and delay the potential for
phosphor burn-in. The time delay and rate of decreasing
picture brightness depend on the brightness of the displayed
image.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_005-007_4250HPX95

5
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 8:50 AM

5

Contents
Important Safety Information ............................................. 2-4

Navigating the menu system ............................................... 41

FCC Declaration of Conformity Compliance Statement
(Part 15): ................................................................................ 5

Chapter 5: TV Guide On Screen™ setup ............................. 42
Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system ..................... 42
TV Guide On Screen™ Reminder ............................... 45
Turning off the TV Guide On Screen™ automatic
display feature ......................................................... 45

Important notes about your Plasma TV ............................... 5
Chapter 1: Introduction .......................................................... 8
Welcome to Toshiba ........................................................... 8
Features of your new TV .................................................... 8
Overview of steps for installing, setting up, and
using your new TV .................................................... 10
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV ......................................... 11
TV front and side panel controls and connections ............ 11
TV back panel connections ................................................ 12
Overview of cable types ...................................................... 14
About the connection illustrations ...................................... 15
Connecting a digital CableCARD™ .................................... 15
Connecting a VCR and antenna or Cable TV
(no Cable box) ............................................................... 16
Connecting a camcorder ..................................................... 16
Connecting a VCR and Cable box ..................................... 17
Connecting a VCR and satellite receiver ............................. 18
Connecting a DVD player with S-video, a VCR,
and a Cable box .............................................................. 19
Connecting a DVD player with ColorStream®
(component video) and a VCR ....................................... 20
Connecting two VCRs ....................................................... 21
Connecting an HDMI™ or a DVI device to the
HDMI input .................................................................. 22
Connecting a digital audio system ...................................... 23
Connecting an analog audio system .................................... 23
Controlling infrared remote-controlled devices
through the TV (IR pass-through) .................................. 24
Connecting IEEE1394 video devices .................................. 25
Using analog-compatible IEEE1394 devices ............... 25
Supported signals ........................................................ 25
Using TheaterNet™ on-screen device control .............. 25
Connecting an AVHD (external hard drive) or D-VHS
digital recorder ........................................................ 26
IEEE1394 device initialization .................................... 26
IEEE1394 device management ................................... 27
G-LINK™ connection ........................................................ 28
Connecting a personal computer (PC) ............................... 29
Connecting to a home network .......................................... 30
Chapter 3: Using the remote control ................................. 31
Learning about the remote control ..................................... 31
Remote control effective range ........................................... 32
Installing the remote control batteries ................................. 33
Using the remote control MODE button to control
your other devices ........................................................... 33
Remote Control functional key chart ................................. 34
Programming the remote control to operate
your other devices ........................................................... 36
Device code setup ....................................................... 36
Searching and sampling the code of a device (8500) .... 36
Using the volume lock feature (8000) ......................... 37
Operational feature reset (8900) .................................. 37
Multi-brand remote control device codes ............................ 38
Chapter 4: Menu layout and navigation ........................... 40
Main menu layout .............................................................. 40
Setup/Installation menu layout ........................................... 41

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV ............................................. 46
Selecting the menu language ............................................... 46
Configuring the antenna input sources ............................... 46
Programming channels into the TV’s channel memory ....... 47
Programming channels automatically .......................... 47
Manually adding and deleting channels in the
channel memory ..................................................... 48
Programming your favorite channels .................................. 49
Setting up and using TheaterNet™ on-screen
device control ................................................................. 50
Setting up TheaterNet ................................................. 50
Using the TheaterNet control icons ............................. 51
TheaterNet IR device codes .................................. 52–54
Setting the AVHD device skip time .................................... 55
Setting the HDMI™ audio mode ........................................ 55
Setting the time and date .................................................... 55
Viewing the CableCARD™ menu ...................................... 56
Viewing the digital signal meter ......................................... 56
Viewing the system status ................................................... 57
Restore Factory Defaults ............................................. 57
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™
interactive program guide ............................................... 58
Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system ..................... 58
Navigating the TV Guide On Screen™ system .................... 59
TV Guide On Screen™ remote control functions ........ 59
Video Window ........................................................... 60
Panel Menus ............................................................... 60
Info Box ...................................................................... 61
TV Guide On Screen™ Icons ...................................... 61
TV Guide On Screen™ Services .......................................... 62
LISTINGS screen ....................................................... 62
SEARCH screen .......................................................... 63
RECORDINGS screen ............................................... 65
SCHEDULE screen .................................................... 66
Record features ........................................................... 66
Remind features .......................................................... 68
SETUP screen ............................................................. 70
Change system settings .......................................... 70
Change channel display ......................................... 70
Change default options .......................................... 71
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features ..................................... 72
Selecting the video input source to view ............................. 72
Labeling the video input sources ......................................... 73
Tuning channels ................................................................. 74
Using the ChannelBrowser™ ....................................... 74
Tuning your favorite channels ..................................... 76
Tuning to the next programmed channel .................... 76
Tuning to a specific channel (programmed or
unprogrammed) ...................................................... 76
Switching between two channels using
Channel Return ...................................................... 76
Switching between two channels using
SurfLock™ ............................................................... 76
(Continued on next page)

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

6
#01E_005-007_4250HPX95

6
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 8:50 AM

Contents

(Continued from previous page)

Selecting the picture size ..................................................... 77
Scrolling the TheaterWide® picture .................................... 79
Using the auto aspect ratio feature ...................................... 79
Selecting the cinema mode (480i signals only) .................... 80
Using the POP features ...................................................... 81
Using the POP double-window feature ....................... 81
Switching the speaker audio (main or POP) ................ 82
POP double-window aspect ratio ................................ 82
Using the FREEZE feature ................................................. 83
Using the favorite channel scan feature ............................... 83
Adjusting the picture .......................................................... 84
Selecting the picture mode .......................................... 84
Adjusting the picture quality ....................................... 84
Using the color management feature ........................... 85
Using CableClear® DNR (digital noise reduction) ...... 86
Selecting the color temperature ................................... 86
Using MPEG noise reduction ..................................... 87
Using dynamic contrast ............................................... 87
Using the closed caption mode ........................................... 87
Advanced closed captions ............................................ 88
Digital closed captions ................................................ 89
Adjusting the audio ............................................................ 90
Muting the sound ....................................................... 90
Using the digital audio selector ................................... 90
Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts ................................... 90
Adjusting the audio quality ......................................... 91
Using the StableSound® feature ................................... 91
Using the SRS WOW™ surround sound feature .......... 92
Using the Dolby Virtual with SRS TruSurround sound
feature ......................................................................... 92
Turning off the built-in speakers ................................. 93
Selecting the optical audio output format ................... 93
Setting the On/Off Timer .................................................. 94
Setting the sleep timer ........................................................ 94
Using the PC setting feature ............................................... 95
Using the Long Life feature ................................................ 95
Picture Shift ................................................................ 95
Gray Level ................................................................... 96
Reverse ........................................................................ 96
White ......................................................................... 96
Displaying the Channel Banner .......................................... 97
Understanding the auto power off feature ........................... 97
Understanding the last mode memory feature .................... 97

Chapter 10: Using the memory card JPEG picture
viewer/MP3 audio player .............................................. 102
Memory card specifications .............................................. 102
Using the JPEG picture viewer ......................................... 103
Using the MP3 audio player ............................................. 104
Memory card care and handling ....................................... 105
Chapter 11: Connecting your TV to the Network .......... 106
Setting up the Network connection .................................. 106
Setting up the Network address ................................. 106
Set up the Email acount ................................................... 107
Timer recording via Email ................................................ 108
Using the audio player/picture viewer via network ............ 109
Procedure for setting up mp3 shares on Windows XP
machine running service pack 2 ............................ 109
Procedure for Windows XP with service pack 1 ........ 110
How do I check if my machine is running service
pack 1 or 2? ........................................................... 110
Set up the Home File server ...................................... 108
To start the Picture viewer/Audio player .................... 111
Chapter 12: Troubleshooting ............................................. 112
General troubleshooting ................................................... 112
TV Guide On Screen™ FAQs ................................... 115–117
Chapter 13: Appendix ......................................................... 118
Specifications ................................................................... 119
Limited United States Warranty ....................................... 119
Limited Canada Warranty ................................................ 120
Index .............................................................................. 124, 125

Chapter 9: Using the Locks menu ...................................... 98
Entering the PIN code ....................................................... 98
If you cannot remember your PIN code ............................. 98
Changing your PIN code ................................................... 98
Blocking TV programs and movies by rating (V-Chip) ......... 99
Blocking channels ............................................................. 100
Unlocking programs temporarily ...................................... 100
Locking video inputs ........................................................ 100
Using the GameTimer™ ................................................... 101
Using the panel lock feature ............................................. 101

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_005-007_4250HPX95

7
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

05.7.12, 11:11

7

1

Introduction

Welcome to Toshiba
Thank you for purchasing this Toshiba TV, one of the innovative Plasma TVs on the
See “Important notes about your
market. The goal of this manual is to guide you through setting up and operating your TV
Plasma TV” on page 5.
as quickly as possible.
• This manual applies to models 42HPX95, and 50HPX95. Before you start reading, check the model number on the back of your TV.
• Instructions in this manual are based on using the remote control. You also can use the controls on the TV side panel if they have
the same name as those referred to on the remote control. (MENU on the side panel functions as ENTER when a menu is onscreen or when the TV Guide On Screen™ system is open.)
• The side panel and back panel provide terminals for connecting other equipment to your TV. See page 11 for side panel details.
See page 12 for back panel details. See pages 15–30 for instructions on connecting other devices to your TV.
• Please read all safety and operating instructions in this manual carefully, and keep this manual for future reference.

Features of your new TV
The following are just a few of the many exciting features of your new Toshiba widescreen, integrated HD, Plasma TV:
• Integrated digital tuning (8VSB ATSC and QAM) eliminates the need for a separate digital converter set-top box (in most cases).
• TV Guide On Screen™ no-fee interactive program guide (Chapters 5 and 7).
• Digital CableCARD™ slot for viewing encrypted digital Cable TV programs (page 15).
• Digital recording by connecting a D-VHS digital recording device or a Toshiba Symbio™ Audio/Video Hard Drive Recorder to
one of the IEEE1394 jacks. You can record high definition and standard definition material from either tuner (page 26).
• Memory card slots [SD Memory Card, MultiMediaCard, Memory Stick, CompactFlash, xD-PictureCard™] for viewing JPEG
files as a “slide show” (page 102) and for playing MP3 files (page 104).
• TheaterNet™ icons for on-screen control of external IR and IEEE1394 devices (page 51).
Note: After you set up the TV Guide
• Two IEEE1394 ports for multi-device connection and control (page 25).
On Screen™ system (Chapter 5),
• Two HDMI (DVI) digital, high-definition multimedia interfaces (page 22).
the program guide opens
®
• Two sets of ColorStream HD high-resolution component video inputs (pages 18 and 20).
automatically by default when
you turn on the TV. You can turn off
• Dolby Digital* (page 23) and SRS WOW™ (page 92) audio technologies.
the automatic program guide (page
• Digital Audio Out optical audio connection (page 23).
45) and instead press the TV GUIDE
• CableClear® DNR digital picture noise reduction (page 86).
button on the remote control to
manually
open the program guide.
• Double-window POP (page 81) and multi-window Favorites (page 83) features.
• PC IN (Analog RGB) computer terminal (page 29).
• RJ-45 (THINC™) port (page 30).
______________
In the United States, TV Guide and other related marks are registered marks of Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or one of its affiliates. In Canada, TV Guide is a registered mark of
Transcontinental Inc., and is used under license by Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. The TV Guide On Screen™ system is manufactured under license from Gemstar-TV Guide
International, Inc. and/or one of its affiliates. The TV Guide On Screen™ system is protected by one or more of the following issued United States patents 6,498,895, 6,418,556, 6,331,877;
6,239,794; 6,154,203; 5,940,073; 4,908,713; 4,751,578; 4,706,121.
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OR
AVAILABILITY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION OR OTHER DATA IN THE TV GUIDE ON SCREEN™ SYSTEM AND CANNOT GUARANTEE
SERVICE AVAILABILITY IN YOUR AREA. IN NO EVENT SHALL GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE ACCURACY OR AVAILABILITY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION OR OTHER
DATA IN THE TV GUIDE ON SCREEN™ SYSTEM.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

8
#01E_008-010_4250HPX95

8
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 8:50 AM

Chapter 1: Introduction

Features of your new TV (continued)
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S.
patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology
must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited pay-perview uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
• WOW, TruSurround, SRS and
symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.
• WOW technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.
• *Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the
double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

• CableCARD™ is a trademark of Cable Television Laboratories, Inc.
•
is a trademark.
• MMC and MultiMediaCard are trademarks of Infineon Technologies AG and licensed to
MMCA (MultiMediaCard Association).
• Memory Stick is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
• xD-Picture Card is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.
• Toshiba is an authorized licensee of the CompactFlash®and CF logo® registered
trademarks.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_008-010_4250HPX95

9
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 8:51 AM

9

Chapter 1: Introduction

Overview of steps for installing, setting up, and using your new TV
Follow these steps to set up your TV and begin using its many exciting features.
1. Carefully read the important safety, installation, care,
and service information on pages 2–5. Keep this
manual for future reference.
2. Observe the following when choosing a location for
the TV:
• Place the TV on the floor or a sturdy, level, stable surface that can
support the weight of the unit. Secure the TV to a wall, pillar, or
other immovable structure as described on page 3, item 19.
• Place the TV in a location where light does not reflect on the
screen.
• Place the TV far enough from walls and other objects to allow
proper ventilation. Inadequate ventilation may cause
overheating, which will damage the TV. THIS TYPE OF
DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED UNDER THE TOSHIBA
WARRANTY.
• Read “Installation” on pages 3–4.
• Read “Important notes about your Plasma TV” on page 5.
3. Do not plug in any power cords until AFTER you have
connected all cables and devices to your TV.
4. BEFORE connecting cables or devices to the TV, learn
the functions of the TV’s connections and controls (pages 11
and 13).
5. Connect your other electronic device(s) to the TV
(pages 15–30).
6. Connect the G-LINK™ cable (either one of the enclosed IR
blaster cables) from your VCR and/or Cable box (if applicable)
to the G-LINK™ terminal so you can use the TV Guide
On Screen™ features (applies to VCRs and cable boxes only).
See page 28.
7. Install the batteries in the remote control (page 33).
8. See “Learning about the remote control” (pages 31-33)
for an overview of the buttons on the remote control.
9. Program the remote control to operate your other
device(s) (pages 36–39).

10. AFTER connecting all cables and devices, plug in the
power cords for your TV and other devices.
“Now Booting...” will be displayed on the screen until the picture
appears or the green LED will blink until the TV goes into
standby mode.
When the TV is in standby mode, press POWER on the TV side
panel or remote control to turn on the TV.
If the TV stops responding to the controls on the remote control
or TV side panel and you cannot turn the TV off or on, press
and hold the POWER button for 5 or more seconds to reset the
TV.
11. See “Menu layout and navigation” for a quick overview
of navigating the TV’s menu system (pages 40–41).
12. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide
On Screen™ system (if available in your area).
13. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide
On Screen™ program guide (if available in your area).
14. Program channels into the TV’s channel memory
(page 47).
15. Set up the TheaterNet™ on-screen device control
feature (if applicable to your particular home theater system
components) (page 50).
16. For details on using the memory card JPEG picture
viewer and MP3 audio player, see page 102.
17. For details on using the TV’s features, see Chapter 8.
18. For help, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide (Chapter
12).
19. For technical specifications and warranty information,
see Chapter 13.
20. Enjoy your new TV!
Note: If you sell or transfer this television to a third party, be sure
to reset the PIN code as described on page 98 under the heading,
“If you cannot remember your PIN code.”

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

10
#01E_008-010_4250HPX95

10
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 8:51 AM

2

Connecting your TV

TV front and side panel controls and connections
TV Front
VIDEO-3 IN !¡

Left side panel

Right side panel

CHANNEL yz 8
yz • x 7
Headphone jack !£

Green and
Red LEDs 2

VOLUME • x 9

Remote
sensor 1
MENU
(ENTER)** 6
EXIT 5

TV/VIDEO 4
GUIDE !º

POWER 3

{

**The MENU button on the TV side panel functions as the ENTER
button in the TV Guide On Screen™ system or when a menu is
on-screen.
Memory card slots !™

1 Remote sensor (behind the screen) — Point the remote
control toward this remote sensor. See “Remote control
effective range” on page 32.
2 Green and Red LEDs
When the green LED lights solid (not blinking), it indicates
that recording is in progress.
When the red LED lights solid (not blinking), it indicates
that the TV power cord is plugged in.
3 POWER — Press to turn the TV on and off.
4 TV/VIDEO — Repeatedly press to change the source you are
viewing (ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3,
HDMI 1, HDMI 2, ColorStream HD1, ColorStream HD2,
PC).
5 EXIT — Press to close an on-screen menu instantly.
6 MENU (ENTER) — Press to access the menu system (see
page 42). When a menu is on-screen or the TV Guide
On Screen™ program guide is open, the MENU button on
the side panel functions as the ENTER button.
7 ARROWS yzx • — When a menu is on-screen, these
buttons function as up/down/left/right menu navigation
buttons.

8 CHANNEL yz — When no menu is on-screen, these
buttons change the channel (programmed channels only; see
page 47). When a menu is on-screen, these buttons function
as up/down menu navigation buttons.
9 VOLUME x • — When no menu is on-screen, these
buttons adjust the volume level. When a menu is on-screen,
these buttons function as left/right menu navigation
buttons.
0 GUIDE — Press to access the TV Guide On Screen™
program guide. (See page 58 for details on using the
program guide.)
!¡ VIDEO-3 — The side panel A/V connections are referred to
as “VIDEO 3” and include standard A/V connections plus
optional S-video. (The VIDEO 1 and VIDEO 2 A/V
connections are on the TV’s back panel; see page 12.)
!™ Memory card slots — Insert a memory card into one of
the memory card slots to view JPEG files (such as photos) as
a “slide show” on your TV or listen to MP3 audio files (see
page 102).
!£ Headphone jack — For use with headphones.
Note: When the Headphone jack is being used, the sound from all
speakers will be muted, and normal sound will be output to the
headphones only.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_011-014_4250HPX95

11
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 8:52 AM

11

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

TV back panel connections
For an explanation of cable types, see page 14.
TV back

Before connecting the external device to
the TV, remove the applicable panel cover
by squeezing the tabs in the direction of
the arrow (%) and pulling the cover.

5

0

8
6

1

7

2

4

9

Wall outlet
120V AC 60Hz
Power cord*

!™
!£

!¡

!¢

3
* The power cord supplied with this product is to be used in United States and Canada only. If this product is
used in another country, use a power cord which confirms to the law or regulations of that country.
Do not remove the noise filter from the power cord. The noise filter is to reduce the interference in image or
sound of other electronic equipment.

1 VIDEO 1 IN and VIDEO 2 IN — Two sets of standard
(composite) video and standard audio inputs plus optional
S-video inputs for connecting devices with composite video
or S-video output.
Note: Standard (composite) video and S-video cables carry
only video information; separate audio cables are required for a
complete connection.

2 ColorStream® HD-1 and ColorStream® HD-2 — Two sets
of ColorStream® high-definition component video and
standard stereo audio inputs for connecting devices with
component video output, such as a Toshiba DVD player
with ColorStream®. See pages 18 and 20.
Note: Component video cables carry only video information;
separate audio cables are required for a complete connection.

3 A/V OUT — Standard composite video and analog audio
outputs for connecting a VCR for editing and dubbing. See
page 21 for details.

4 VARIABLE AUDIO OUT — Standard analog audio outputs
for connecting an analog amplifier with external speakers.
See page 23.
5 TheaterNet™ (IR) OUT — For controlling infrared remotecontrolled devices through the TV. You can connect up to
two devices with either one of the enclosed IR blaster cables,
and then control the devices using the TV’s IR pass-through
or TheaterNet™ (on-screen device control) features. See
pages 24 and 51.
TheaterNet™ (IR) IN — For connecting to IR OUT on

other devices. See page 26.
6 HDMI AUDIO IN — For use when connecting a DVI device
with analog audio output to the HDMI input. See page 22.
Also see item 8 on the next page.

___________
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

12
#01E_011-014_4250HPX95

12
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 8:52 AM

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

TV back panel connections (continued)
7 ANT 1 (CABLE) IN and ANT 2 IN — Two inputs that
support analog (NTSC) and digital (ATSC) off-air antenna
signals and analog and digital (QAM) Cable TV signals.
Note: If you have an antenna only, connect it to ANT 1. If you have
both cable TV and an antenna, connect the cable TV to ANT 1 and
the antenna to ANT 2.

8 HDMI™ IN — High-Definition Multimedia Interface input
receives digital audio and uncompressed digital video from
an HDMI device or uncompressed digital video from a DVI
device. See page 22.

*THINC™ System (Toshiba Home Interactive
Network Connection) This RJ-45 Port allows select Toshiba Cinema Series TV’s
to connect to a Desktop or Laptop PC. This revolutionary
Home Entertainment Networking System lets you access
all of the MP3 audio files or JPEG pictures stored on your
PC, using only the TV remote (without ever leaving the
couch). If your TV is connected to your audio system, you
can even use it to play back all of your MP3 audio files.

9 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT — Optical audio output in Dolby
Digital or PCM (pulse-code modulation) format for
connecting an external Dolby Digital decoder, amplifier,
A/V receiver, or home theater system with optical audio
input. See page 23.
0 G-LINK™ — For use with one of the enclosed IR blaster/
G-LINK™ cables to enable the TV Guide On Screen™
recording features. See page 28.
!¡ (2) IEEE1394 — Two bi-directional digital IEEE1394 ports
for connecting multiple devices with compressed digital
video. Because these ports are bi-directional, they can be
used for playback and recording. You can control your
IEEE1394 devices using the TV’s TheaterNet on-screen
device control icons. See pages 25–26 and 50.
Note: IEEE1394 cable carries both audio and video information;
separate audio cables are not required.

!™ RJ-45 (THINC™)* — For use when connecting Network See
page 30.
!£ CableCARD™ slot — For use with a digital security card and
digital cable TV service (provided by your local cable operator)
to view encrypted digital programming. See pages 15 and 56.
!¢ PC IN — For use when connecting a personal computer
(PC). See page 29.

___________
CableCARD is a trademark of Cable Television Laboratories, Inc.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_011-014_4250HPX95

13
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 8:53 AM

13

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Overview of cable types
Note: Two dual-wand IR blaster/G-LINK™ cables are included with your TV. All other required
cables, if not provided with your other devices, can be purchased at many electronics accessory
suppliers.

Coaxial (F-type) cable

Coaxial (F-type) cable is used for connecting your antenna, cable TV service, and/or
cable converter box to the ANT 1 and/or ANT 2 RF inputs on your TV.
● Standard A/V cables (composite video) usually come in sets of three, and are for use
with video devices with standard audio and standard (composite) video output. These
cables (and the related inputs on your TV) are typically color-coded according to use:
yellow for video, red for stereo right audio, and white for stereo left (or mono) audio.
● S-video cable is for use with video devices with S-video output. Separate audio cables
are required for a complete connection.
●

Standard A/V cables (red/white/yellow)

S-video cable

Note: An S-video cable provides better picture performance than a composite video cable. If
you connect an S-video cable, be sure to disconnect the standard (composite) video cable or
the picture performance will be unacceptable.
●

Component video cables (red/green/blue)

Component video cables come in sets of three and are for use with video devices with
component video output. (ColorStream ® is Toshiba’s brand of component video.)
These cables are typically color-coded red, green, and blue. Separate audio cables are
required for a complete connection.

HDMI cable

Note: Component video cables provide better picture performance than a standard (composite)
video or S-video cable.
●

HDMI cable is for use with devices with HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia
Interface) output. HDMI cable delivers digital audio and video in its native format.
This cable carries both video and audio information; therefore, separate audio cables are
not required for a complete HDMI device connection. See page 22 for further details.

IEEE1394 cable (4-pin)

Note: HDMI cable provides better picture performance than a standard (composite) video or
S-video cable.
●

Dual-wand IR blaster/G-LINK™ cable
(2 included)

IEEE1394 cable is for use with video devices with compressed digital video output
that meet CEA specifications for IEEE1394. This cable carries both video and audio
information; therefore, no separate audio cables are required for a complete connection.
See pages 25–27.
Note:
• The transmission capability of any IEEE1394 cable used with this TV must be S400
(400 Mbps maximum).
• IEEE1394 cable provides better picture performance than a standard (composite)
video or S-video cable.

●

Optical audio cable

Dual-wand IR blaster/G-LINK™ cable is for use with video devices with IR (infrared)
remote control. Two of these cables are included with your TV. One is for connection
to the G-LINK™ terminal (page 28) to enable TV Guide On Screen ™ recording
features (Chapters 5 and 7). The other can be used with the TV’s IR pass-through
feature (page 24) and TheaterNet™ on-screen device control feature (page 50).
Note: The two IR blaster/G-LINK™ cables included with your TV have specific characteristics that
allow them to work properly with this TV’s IR OUT and G-LINK™ ports. Never use other
aftermarket IR blaster or G-LINK™ cables with this TV. Other cables may not function
properly and can cause damage. THIS TYPE OF DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED BY YOUR
TOSHIBA WARRANTY.

Optical audio cable is for connecting receivers with Dolby Digital or PCM
(pulse-code modulation) optical audio input to the TV’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
terminal. See page 23.
● RJ-45 (LAN) cable is for used to connect to the Internet. See page 30.
●

RJ-45 (LAN) cable

Note: Although your TV includes both HDMI
and IEEE1394 connections, it may not
operate with another device you have that
includes such a connection. For example, the
IEEE1394 ports are not intended to operate
with current model Mini DV camcorders, and
the HDMI input is not intended for
connection to a computer. Copyright
protection requirements may also prohibit or
limit connectivity. See page 22 for details
about the HDMI input. See pages 25–27 for
details about the IEEE1394 ports.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

14
#01E_011-014_4250HPX95

14
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 8:53 AM

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

About the connection illustrations
You can connect different types and brands of devices to your TV in several different configurations. The connection illustrations in
this manual are representative of typical device connections only. The input/output terminals on your devices may differ from those
illustrated herein. For details on connecting and using your specific devices, refer to each device’s owner’s manual.

Connecting a digital CableCARD™
This digital television is capable of receiving analog basic, digital
basic, and digital premium cable television programming by
direct connection to a cable system providing such
programming.
A security card (such as a digital CableCARD™), provided by
your cable operator, is required to view encrypted digital
programming.
Certain advanced and interactive digital cable services (such as
video-on-demand, a cable operator’s enhanced program guide,
and data-enhanced television services) will not work with the
use of a CableCARD™ and may require the use of a separate settop box from your cable operator.
For more information, call your local cable operator.
You will need:
 one digital CableCARD™ (contact your cable operator)
 digital cable subscription service (contact your cable
operator)


 To view encrypted digital channels:
1. Connect your digital Cable TV cable to ANT 1.
2. With the front of the CableCARD™ facing up, insert it into
the CableCARD™ slot on the back of the TV (see
illustration below left).
3. After the CableCARD™ is inserted, a CableCARD™ option
appears in the Applications menu, with informational
screens provided by your digital CableCARD™ service. See
page 56 for additional information.
CableCard Connected -- Acquiring
channel information.
Applications

CableCard services will only operate
with cable signal connected to Antenna 1.

TV Guide On Screen

IP Service
Conditional Access

Audio Player
Picture Viewer

CableCARD(tm) Status

Digital CC/Audio Selector

Network Setup

CableCARD

CableCARD(tm) Pairing

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

TV back panel
Note:
• Always use the EJECT button to remove the CableCARD™. Never
remove the CableCARD™ by hand.
• Never insert any object or card (including, without limitation, a
PCMCIA card) other than a CableCARD™ into the CableCARD™
slot.
• Always make sure the CableCARD™ is facing the correct direction.
• Connect the cable for your digital cable TV service to ANT 1 only.
• When using a CableCARD™, channel programming is unnecessary
because the CableCARD™ automatically loads the cable channel
list into the TV’s channel memory (page 47).
• The CableCARD™ may take up to 5 minutes to “pair” with the TV
and download channel information. CableCARD™ information and
channels will not be available until this process is completed.

From digital Cable service
(connect to ANT 1 only)

This cable should be connected to ANT 1 terminal directly. If you connect
the cable via a VCR, the TV may not receive the signals correctly.

________

CableCARD™ technology, like all new and emerging technology, may
from time to time experience compatibility issues due to the different ways
in which television manufacturers and cable system operators implement
the CableCARD™ specifications. Most issues can be easily resolved. In
the event that you experience any performance-related CableCARD™
issues with your Toshiba television, please contact the following:
• In the U.S., call TACP Consumer Solutions at (800) 631-3811 or visit
http://www.tacp.com/customersupport/contact.asp.

CableCARD is a trademark of Cable Television Laboratories, Inc.

• In Canada, call TCL Customer Service at 1-800-268-3404.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_015-030_4250HPX95

15
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 8:54 AM

15

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Connecting a VCR and antenna or Cable TV (no Cable box)
You will need:
 one signal splitter
 three coaxial cables
 two sets of standard A/V cables

From Cable TV or antenna
Signal splitter
OUT

• For better picture performance, if your VCR has S-video, use an
S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead of the standard
video cable. However, do not connect both types of video cables
to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time or the picture
performance will be unacceptable.
• If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV to your
VCR’s audio out terminal using the white audio cable only.

IN
OUT

Stereo VCR
VIDEO
IN from ANT

AUDIO
L
R

CH 3
CH 4

IN

OUT to TV

OUT

L


 To view the antenna or Cable signal:

R

TV back panel

Select the ANT 1 video input source on the TV.*


 To view the VCR:

Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source
on the TV.*


 To use the TV Guide On Screen

™

recording features:
Connect the G-LINK cable according to the
instructions on page 28.
Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT
terminals on the TV (see illustration).
Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your
VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the
VCR.
See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide
On Screen™ system.
See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide
On Screen™ system.
™

1.
2.
3.

4.
5.

Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the
ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when the
appropriate input mode is selected.
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject
you to civil and criminal liability.

Connecting a camcorder
You will need:
 one set of standard A/V cables

Camcorder
VIDEO 3 inputs on TV
left side panel

• For better picture performance, if your camcorder has S-video, use an
S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead of the standard video cable.
Do not connect both an S-video cable and a standard video cable to VIDEO
3 at the same time or the picture performance will be unacceptable.

VIDEO

AUDIO
OUT
L


 To view the camcorder video:

R

Select the VIDEO 3 video input source on the TV.*
______________
* To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control (see page 72).
To program the TV remote control to operate other devices, see Chapter 3.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

16
#01E_015-030_4250HPX95

16
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 8:54 AM

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Connecting a VCR and Cable box
You will need:
 one signal splitter
 five coaxial cables
 two sets of standard A/V cables

From Cable TV

OUT

IN

Signal splitter

Cable box
CH 3
CH 4

IN

OUT

OUT

Stereo VCR

• For better picture performance from your VCR: If your VCR has
S-video, connect an S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead
of the standard video cable. Do not connect an S-video cable and
a standard video cable to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time
or the picture performance will be unacceptable.

VIDEO
IN from ANT

AUDIO
L
R

CH 3
CH 4

IN

OUT to TV

OUT

L

• If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV to your
VCR’s audio out terminal using the white audio cable only.

R

TV back panel

• When you use a Cable box, you may not be able to use the remote
control to program or access certain features on the TV.


 To view basic Cable channels and use the TV’s features:
Select the ANT 1 video input source on the TV.* Use the
TV controls (side panel or remote control) to change
channels and access the TV’s features.


 To view basic and premium Cable channels:
Turn OFF the VCR. Select the ANT 2 video input source
on the TV.* Tune the TV to channel 3 or 4 (whichever
channel the Cable box output is set to). Use the Cable box
controls to change channels.


 To view the VCR:
Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source
on the TV.*
Note: A VIDEO 1 connection with an S-Video cable (instead
of a standard video cable) will provide better picture
performance (as mentioned in the first bulleted item at the
top of this page).
_____________
* To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control
(see page 72). To program the TV remote control to operate other
devices, see Chapter 3.

The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject
you to civil and criminal liability.

Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the
ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when the
appropriate input mode is selected.


 To enable the TV Guide On Screen
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.

™
system to work
with your cable box and to use the TV Guide
On Screen™ recording features:
Connect the G-LINK™ cable according to the
instructions on page 28.
Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT
terminals on the TV (see illustration).
Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your
VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the
VCR.
See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide
On Screen™ system.
See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide
On Screen™ system.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_015-030_4250HPX95

17
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 8:55 AM

17

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Connecting a VCR and satellite receiver
From antenna

You will need:
 one signal splitter
 four coaxial cables
 one set of component video cables (if your satellite receiver
does not have component video, connect the standard A/V
cables only)
 one pair of standard audio cables
 three sets of standard A/V cables

Signal splitter

IN

OUT

OUT

Stereo VCR
VIDEO

AUDIO
L
R

IN from ANT
CH 3
CH 4

IN

OUT to TV

OUT

L

• For better picture performance, if your satellite receiver and VCR
have S-video, connect S-video cables (plus the audio cables)
instead of the standard video cables. Do not connect both types of
video cables to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time or the
picture performance will be unacceptable.

R

TV back panel

• If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV (VIDEO 1)
to your VCR’s audio out terminal using the white audio cable only.


 To view satellite programs using the component video
connections:
Select the ColorStream HD-1 video input source on the
TV.*


 To view satellite programs using the standard

video connections or to record satellite programs:
Turn on all three devices. Set the VCR to the appropriate
line input (refer to your VCR owner’s manual for details).
Select the VIDEO 2 video input source on the TV.*

From satellite dish
Satellite receiver


 To view the VCR or view and record antenna channels:

Y

S-VIDEO
OUT

Turn ON the VCR. Tune the VCR to the channel you want
to watch. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source on the
TV.*
_____________
* To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control
(see page 72). To program the TV remote control to operate other
devices, see Chapter 3.

PB

AUDIO
OUT L

L

PR

Satellite
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO

R

VIDEO
OUT

R

Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the ANT 1,
ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when the appropriate
input mode is selected.


 To enable the TV Guide On Screen

™

1.
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject
you to civil and criminal liability.

2.
3.

4.
5.

recording features:
Connect the G-LINK cable according to the
instructions on page 28.
Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT
terminals on the TV (see illustration).
Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your
VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the
VCR.
See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide
On Screen™ system.
See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide
On Screen™ system.
™

Note: The TV Guide On Screen™ system does not receive program
listings from or for any satellite service.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

18
#01E_015-030_4250HPX95

18
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 8:55 AM

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Connecting a DVD player with S-video, a VCR, and a Cable box
From antenna or Cable TV

You will need:
 one signal splitter
 five coaxial cables
 two sets of standard A/V cables

CH 3
CH 4

OUT

IN

Signal splitter

Cable box
IN

OUT

OUT

Stereo VCR

Note: If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV
(VIDEO 1) to your VCR’s audio out terminal using the white audio
cable only.

VIDEO
IN from ANT

AUDIO
L

CH 3
CH 4

IN

OUT to TV

 one S-video cable
 one pair of standard audio cables

OUT

R

TV back panel

Note:
• If your DVD player does not have S-video, use a standard video
cable instead. Do not connect an S-video cable and a standard
video cable to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time or the
picture performance will be unacceptable.
• If your DVD player has component video, see page 20.
• Do not connect the DVD player and VCR to the same set of
A/V inputs on the TV. (See the illustration, which shows the
VCR connected to VIDEO 1 on the TV, and the DVD player
connected to VIDEO 2.)


 To view basic channels and access the TV’s features:
Select the ANT 1 video input source.* Use the TV controls
to change channels and access the TV’s features.

AUDIO
OUT


 To view premium Cable channels:

L

Turn OFF the VCR. Select the ANT 2 video input source
on the TV.* Tune the TV to channel 3 or 4 (whichever
channel the Cable box output is set to). Use the Cable box
controls to change channels.
Note: When you use a Cable box, you may not be able to
use the remote control to program or access certain features
on the TV.


 To view the DVD player:
Turn ON the DVD player. Select the VIDEO 2 video
input source on the TV.*

S-VIDEO
OUT

Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source
on the TV.*
_____________
* To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control
(see page 72). To program the TV remote control to operate other
devices, see Chapter 3.
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may
subject you to civil and criminal liability.

Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the ANT 1,
ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when the appropriate
input mode is selected.


 To enable the TV Guide On Screen
2.
3.

4.
5.

19
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

™

recording
features:
Connect the G-LINK™ cable according to the
instructions on page 28.
Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT
terminals on the TV (see illustration).
Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your
VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the
VCR.
See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide
On Screen™ system.
See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide
On Screen™ system.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_015-030_4250HPX95

R

DVD player with S-video

1.


 To view the VCR:

VIDEO
OUT

7/12/05, 8:55 AM

19

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Connecting a DVD player with ColorStream® (component video) and a VCR
Your TV has ColorStream® (component video) inputs.
You will need:
 one signal splitter
 three coaxial cables
 two sets of standard A/V cables
• For better picture performance, if your VCR has S-video, use an
S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead of the standard
video cable. However, do not connect both types of video cables
to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time or the picture
performance will be unacceptable.
• If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV
(VIDEO 1) to your VCR’s audio out terminal using the white
audio cable only.

From antenna or Cable
Signal splitter

IN

OUT

OUT

Stereo VCR
VIDEO

AUDIO
L
R

IN from ANT
CH 3
CH 4

IN

OUT to TV

OUT

L

R

TV back panel

 one pair of standard audio cables
 one set of component video cables
• You can connect the component video cables (plus audio
cables) from the DVD player to either set of ColorStream
terminals on the TV (HD-1 or HD-2). The ColorStream HD-1
and HD-2 terminals can be used with Progressive (480p,
720p) and Interlaced (480i, 1080i) scan systems. A 1080i
signal will provide the best picture performance.
• If your DVD player does not have component video, see page
19. If your DVD player has HDMI video, see page 22.


 To view antenna or Cable channels:
Select the ANT 1 video input source on the TV.*


 To view the DVD player:
Turn ON the DVD player. Select the ColorStream HD-1
video input source on the TV.*


 To view the VCR:
Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input
source on the TV.*


 To record a TV program while watching a DVD:
Turn ON the VCR. Tune the VCR to the channel to
record. Select the ColorStream HD-1 video input source
on the TV* to view the DVD.
_____________
* To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control
(see page 72). To program the TV remote control to operate other
devices, see Chapter 3.
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject
you to civil and criminal liability.

Y

PB

AUDIO
OUT

PR

L

S-VIDEO
OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

VIDEO
OUT

DVD player with component video

Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the ANT 1,
ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when the appropriate
input mode is selected.


 To enable the TV Guide On Screen

™

recording features:
1. Connect the G-LINK cable according to the
instructions on page 28.
2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT
terminals on the TV (see illustration).
3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your
VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the
VCR.
4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide
On Screen™ system.
5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide
On Screen™ system.
™

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

20
#01E_015-030_4250HPX95

20
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

R

7/12/05, 8:56 AM

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Connecting two VCRs
You will need:
 one signal splitter
 three coaxial cables
 two sets of standard A/V cables

From antenna or Cable
Signal splitter
OUT

• For better picture performance, if VCR 1 has S-video, use
an S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead of the
standard video cable. However, do not connect both types
of video cables to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time
or the picture performance will be unacceptable.

IN

**
OUT

VCR1 (plays)
VIDEO

AUDIO
L
R

IN from ANT
CH 3
CH 4

IN

OUT to TV

OUT

L

• If VCR 1 has mono audio, connect L/MONO on the TV (VIDEO 1)
to the audio out terminal on VCR 1 using the white audio cable
only.

R

TV back panel

• Do not connect the same VCR to the output and input terminals on
the TV at the same time.


 To view the antenna or Cable signal:
Select the ANT 1 video input source on the TV.*

a


 To view VCR 1:
Turn ON VCR 1. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source
on the TV.*


 To dub or edit from VCR 1 to VCR 2:
Turn ON both VCRs. Set VCR 2 to the appropriate line
input (refer to your VCR owner’s manual for details). Select
the VIDEO 1 video input source on the TV.*

b
VCR2 (records)
VIDEO
IN from ANT

Note:

CH 3
CH 4

L

OUT to TV

• If you have a Cable box, connect the Cable box and splitter to VCR1
as shown on page 17.
• The VIDEO OUT signal incorporates Macrovision® copyright
protection technology, which may prevent you from recording certain
copy-restricted video materials.***

*** This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by
U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other
limited pay-per-view uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Macrovision is a registered
trademark of Macrovision Corporation.
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject
you to civil and criminal liability.

21

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

R
R

The VIDEO OUT terminal does not output the POP picture.

b

When POP mode is active, the AUDIO OUT terminals output the
sound of the active window (main or POP). For additional
information, see “Notes about recording” on page 81.
Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the
ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when
the appropriate input mode is selected.


 To enable the TV Guide On Screen

™

1.
2.
3.

4.

recording features:
Connect the G-LINK cable according to the
instructions on page 28.
Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT
terminals on the TV (see illustration).
Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your
VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the
VCR.
See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide
On Screen™ system.
See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide
On Screen™ system.
™

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

Black

IN

OUT

a

5.

#01E_015-030_4250HPX95

R

L

_________________________________________________________________
* To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control
(see page 72). To program the TV remote control to operate other
devices, see Chapter 3.
** Do not connect the unit through a VCR. Video signals fed through VCRs may be
affected by copyright protection systems and the picture will be distorted on the TV.

AUDIO
L

7/12/05, 8:56 AM

21

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Connecting an HDMI™ or a DVI device to the HDMI input
The HDMI[1] input on your TV receives digital audio and
uncompressed digital video from an HDMI device or
uncompressed digital video from a DVI[2] device.
This input is designed to accept HDCP [3] program material in
digital form from EIA/CEA-861/861B–compliant [4] consumer
electronic devices (such as a set-top box or DVD player with
HDMI or DVI output).
The HDMI input is designed for best performance with 720p
signals but will also accept and display 1080i, 480i, and 480p
signals.
NOTE: NEVER CONNECT THIS TV
TO A PERSONAL COMPUTER (PC).
THIS TV IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE WITH A PC.

To connect an HDMI device, you will need:
• one HDMI cable (type A connector) per HDMI
device
For proper operation, it is recommended that you use as
short an HDMI cable as possible.
HDMI cable transfers both video and audio. Separate
analog audio cables are not required (see illustration
below). Some CDVs (video CDs) may not output digital
audio signals. In that case, you may hear sound by
connecting analog audio cables.
See “Setting the HDMI audio mode” on page 55.
HDMI device
HDMI OUT
VIDEO

AUDIO

L

R

IN

L

R

OUT

__________________________________________________________________
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]

HDMI = High-Definition Multimedia Interface.
DVI = Digital Video Interface.
HDCP = High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection.
EIA/CEA-861/861B compliance covers the transmission of
uncompressed digital video with high-bandwidth digital content
protection, which is being standardized for reception of high-definition
video signals. Because this is an evolving technology, it is possible that
some devices may not operate properly with the TV.
Note: To ensure that the HDMI or DVI device is reset
properly, it is recommended that you follow these
procedures:
• When turning on your electronic components, turn on
the TV first, and then the HDMI or DVI device.
• When turning off your electronic components, turn off
the HDMI or DVI device first, and then the TV.

To connect a DVI device, you will need:
• one HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable (HDMI type A
connector) per DVI device
For proper operation, the length of an HDMI-to-DVI adapter
cable should not exceed 9.8 ft (3m). The recommended length
is 6.6 ft (2m).

• one pair of standard analog audio cables per DVI
device
An HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable transfers video only.
Separate analog audio cables are required (see
illustration below).
See “Setting the HDMI audio mode” on page 55.
DVI device

TV back panel

VIDEO
L

R

L

R

IN

OUT

R

TV back panel

___________
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

22
#01E_015-030_4250HPX95

22
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

DVI/HDCP
OUT

AUDIO

7/12/05, 8:57 AM

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Connecting a digital audio system
Dolby Digital decoder or
other digital audio system

The TV’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal outputs a Dolby
Digital
or 2-channel down-mixed PCM (pulse-code
modulation) signal for use with an external Dolby Digital
decoder or other external audio system with optical audio input.
You will need:
 one optical audio cable (Use an optical audio cable that has
the larger “TosLink” connector and not the smaller
“mini-optical” connector.)
To control the audio:
Turn on the TV and the digital audio device.
Press MENU on the TV’s remote control and open the AUDIO
menu.
Highlight Audio Setup and press ENTER.
In the Optical Output Format field, select either Dolby Digital
or PCM, depending on your
device (see “Selecting the
Audio
optical audio output format”
Audio Settings
on page 93).
Advanced Audio Settings
Audio Setup

Audio Setup
MTS

Stereo

Language

English

Speakers

On

Optical Output Format
Reset

Dolby Digital
Done

LINE IN
L
R

Optical
Audio IN

TV back panel

Note:
• Some audio systems may not be compatible with Dolby Digital bitstream
signals. Older audio systems that are not compatible with standard
optical out signals may not work properly, creating a high noise level that
may damage speakers or headphones. THIS DAMAGE IS NOT
COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY.
• The DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal outputs signals only when receiving
digital broadcasts with the TV in single-window mode.
• The DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal may not output some digital audio
sources because of copy restrictions.

Turn off the TV’s built-in speakers in the same Audio Setup
menu (above). Also see “Turning off the built-in speakers” on
page 93.

Connecting an analog audio system
This connection allows you to use external speakers with an
external audio amplifier to adjust the sound level.
You will need:
 one pair of standard audio cables
To control the audio:
Turn on the TV and the stereo amplifier.
Turn off the TV’s built-in speakers (see “Turning off the built-in
speakers” on page 93).

Analog audio amplifier
LINE IN
L
R

TV back panel

Note: To hear sound when using an external audio amplifier,
the volume of both the TV and the amplifier must be set to a
reasonable listening level.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_015-030_4250HPX95

23
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 8:58 AM

23

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Controlling infrared remote-controlled devices through the TV (IR pass-through)
Front of IR-controlled DVD player (for example)

You can use the TV’s IR OUT terminal (infrared pass-through)
to remotely operate (through the TV) many infrared remotecontrolled devices (such as a Toshiba infrared remote-controlled
VCR or DVD player) enclosed within an entertainment center
or similar cabinet. Without the IR OUT connection, the device
typically would need to be visible to operate it remotely.
You will need:
 one dual-wand IR blaster cable (included with your TV)
 other audio/video cables as required to connect the device(s)
to the TV (see pages 15–30)
To connect the IR blaster cable:
1. Locate the infrared sensor on the front of your device. This
sensor is marked on some devices.*
2. Align one of the IR blaster cable’s wands about 1 inch away
from the infrared sensor on the front of the device and
attach it using double-sided mounting tape. If you have a
second device, attach the second wand in a similar manner.
(See illustration at right.)

Front of IR-controlled audio device (for example)

Infrared
sensor
IR blaster cable wand
(approx. 1 inch from device)
TV back panel

Note: If you do not have a second device, coil the second wand
with a rubber band and leave it behind the TV.

3. Plug the IR blaster cable’s plug into one of the TV’s
TheaterNet OUT terminals.
To control the device(s):
Point the TV remote control
(programmed to operate the device; see
Chapter 3) or the device’s remote
control at the front of the TV and press
the button for the desired function.
The signal passes from the remote
control through the TV to the device
via the IR blaster cable.
Note:
• If you use the device’s remote control to
operate the device, you also will need to
use the TV’s remote control to operate
the TV.
• For additional control options, see “TheaterNet on-screen device
control” at right.

* If you cannot locate the device’s infrared sensor:
1. Turn OFF the device.
2. Starting at the lower left corner of the device, place the end of the
device’s remote control (with the infrared emitter) so it touches the
front of the device and press POWER. (Do not use the TV’s remote
control for this step.)
3. If the device turns on, the point at which the remote control touched
the device is the location of the sensor.
4. If the device does not turn on, move the remote control slightly to the
right and press POWER again.
5. Repeat step 4 until you locate the device’s infrared sensor.

TheaterNet™ on-screen device control
For additional control options for
your home theater system, set up
the TheaterNet on-screen device
control feature. You can use this
feature to control many IR
remote-controlled devices and
IEEE1394 devices using the onscreen control icons.

#01E_015-030_4250HPX95

24
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Video 3

ENTER
TOP MENU

EXIT

See pages 50–54 for details on setting
up and using TheaterNet.
See pages 25–27 for details on
connecting IEEE1394 devices.
Note: The TheaterNet on-screen icons are the only device functions
available when the icons are on-screen. To access other device
functions, close the TheaterNet icon window.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

24

Toshiba

7/12/05, 8:58 AM

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Connecting IEEE1394 video devices
You can use the two bi-directional IEEE1394 ports on the back
of your TV to connect digital video devices that meet CEA
specifications for IEEE1394.
Because these ports are bi-directional, they can be used for both
playback and recording.
• Because IEEE1394 is an evolving technology, it is possible that some
or all of the connectivity features of a device you connect to the TV
through the IEEE1394 ports may not operate. You should confirm
that the devices you want to use with the IEEE1394 ports will operate
with those ports.
• This TV does not support all possible IEEE1394 signal types. For
information on signals supported by the IEEE1394 ports, see
“Supported signals” at right.
• IEEE1394 cable carries both audio and video information;
separate audio cables are not required.

The IEEE1394 ports support only the signals listed below.
Even though incompatible video, audio, and digital control
signals cannot be decoded by the TV, these signals may be
passed through the IEEE1394 cable to other compatible devices.
Incompatible devices may not appear in the TheaterNet™ menu.
• MPEG-2 digital video signals
Other digital video signals—such as DV video—are
incompatible and must be decoded by the source device and
sent to the TV as analog video (composite or S-video).

• Dolby Digital and MPEG digital audio signals
Other digital audio signals (such as DPM, MP3, and DTS) are
incompatible and cannot be decoded by the TV.

• EIA-775 and AV/C digital control

You will need:
 one (or two) IEEE1394 cable(s)
Note: The transmission capability of IEEE1394 cable used with this
TV must be S400 (400 Mbps maximum).

 additional A/V cables if your device is analog-compatible
(see “Using analog-compatible IEEE1394 devices” below).
TV back panel

Supported signals

Two bi-directional IEEE1394 ports

Your TV can serve as the control center for many devices
that are compatible with EIA-775 or AV/C IEEE1394
control standards (described below).
The TV cannot control IEEE1394 devices that use any other
control standards.

{

– EIA-775 digital control allows tuning devices (such as
Cable boxes) to send simple graphics; however, this
standard does not allow the TV to control the Cable box
through IEEE1394.
– AV/C (audio/video control) provides basic control (such
as power, play, stop rewind, fast-forward, pause, and
record), as applicable to the specific device.

Using TheaterNet™ on-screen device
control
You can use the TheaterNet feature to control some IEEE1394
devices using on-screen control icons. See page 50 for details on
setting up and using the TheaterNet feature.

From IEEE1394 devices
(such as AVHD or D-VHS)

Using analog-compatible IEEE1394
devices

Note: If the TheaterNet feature does not control your
IEEE1394 device, you can either use the device’s remote
control or try using IR pass-through with the TV’s remote
control (page 24).

Some digital IEEE1394 devices are compatible with analog
signals. For example, some D-VHS VCRs can record and play
VHS or S-VHS format videos. Such devices allow you to play
analog tapes that you rented or recorded, or record analog
programs from antenna or Cable TV systems. To use the
IEEE1394 device’s analog features, you need to connect the
device to the TV using standard A/V cables (or S-video plus
audio cables) in addition to connecting the IEEE1394 cable.
Note: If you have an IEEE1394 device connected to both digital
and analog inputs on the TV, the TV automatically switches
between digital and analog modes, as needed, when the initial
device access is initiated using the TheaterNet button.
See page 50 for details on using the TheaterNet feature.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_015-030_4250HPX95

25
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 8:59 AM

25

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Connecting IEEE1394 video devices (continued)
Connecting an AVHD (external hard
drive) or D-VHS digital recorder
You can connect an IEEE1394 compatible D-VHS or AVHD
(audio/video hard drive) digital recorder (such as Toshiba’s
Symbio™ AVHD Recorder) to record high definition and
standard definition material from either tuner and control live
TV (pause, rewind, etc.).
When you connect a D-VHS or AVHD device to the TV:
• The remote control keys (Live, REW, PAUSE, PLAY, FF, etc.) are
automatically activated to allow control of live TV.
• The TV Guide On Screen™ system is automatically configured to
allow recording to the device.* See Chapters 5 and 7 for details.
Also see page 52 for details on setting the AVHD device skip time.
• Some programs may not be recorded due to copy protection
restrictions.

This TV is compatible with the new Toshiba

IEEE1394 device initialization
When you connect a new IEEE1394 device to the TV and turn
it on, the device immediately announces its presence to the TV
(and other networked IEEE1394 devices, if any), and the
following device initialization screen automatically appears.
Note: With some devices, it may take up to one minute for this
screen to appear.

1. If you also connected your IEEE1394 device to an analog
input, use the yzx • buttons to select the input in the
Analog Input Used field; otherwise, leave it set to “None.”
(See “Using analog-compatible IEEE1394 devices” on page
25.)
2. If you want to label the device, highlight Edit Label and
press ENTER.
New IEEE1394 Device Initilization
Manufacturer

TOSHIBA

Device Type

AVHD

Custom Label

Edit Label

TM

Audio/Video Hard Drive Recorder!
Toshiba’s Symbio™ AVHD Recorder is designed specifically for
high definition television (HDTV) and offers control over digital
video recording and playback.
Think of it as a “tapeless VCR” for digital television. You can
pause, rewind, or use instant replay, so you’ll never miss a thing!
Symbio also offers one-touch recording* of both standard and
High Definition programs through the no-fee TV Guide
On Screen™ interactive program guide built in to this TV.

Done

3. Press the yzx • buttons to select a character for the first
space and then press ENTER.
4. Repeat step 3 to enter the rest of the characters.
5. Highlight Done and press ENTER to save the information.
IEEE1394 Device Label Edit

MY DEVICE_
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject
you to civil and criminal liability.

SPC

CLR

Cancel

BS

Done

Note:

* Note: To enjoy the full benefits of your Symbio AVHD Recorder, you
must first set up the TV Guide On Screen™ system (see Chapter 5).
Full Symbio AVHD Recorder benefits, including Intelligent One Touch
recording, will not be available unless the TV Guide On Screen™
system is fully operational. However, when the TV Guide On Screen™
system is not fully operational, manual recording is available as long
as the TV Guide On Screen™ system has acquired the necessary date
and time data. If you experience any issues with your Symbio AVHD
Recorder, please contact the following:

• The TV may not recognize incompatible or non-A/V IEEE1394
devices; however, these devices may still be available to other
compatible IEEE1394 devices on the network.

• In the U.S., call TACP Consumer Solutions at (800) 631-3811 or visit

• Toshiba is not liable for the operation of any IEEE1394 device
other than the Toshiba Symbio AVHD recorder.

http://www.tacp.com/customersupport/contact.asp.

• You may be able to use the TV’s remote control to operate some
compatible IEEE1394 devices. You must first program the
remote control to recognize the device (see Chapter 3). If you
have an IEEE1394 Cable box or satellite receiver, you may need
to use the remote control that came with the device.

• In Canada, call TCL Customer Service at 1-800-268-3404.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

26
#01E_015-030_4250HPX95

26
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 8:59 AM

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Connecting IEEE1394 video devices (continued)
IEEE1394 device management
The IEEE1394 device information is saved in the TV’s memory.
You can edit this device information (for example, edit the
device name, change the analog input information, or delete the
device information from the TV’s memory if you no longer use
that device).
To edit the IEEE1394 device information:
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of
Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in
step 3 below).

Important information regarding IEEE1394
device interconnection
• Never loop the last device in the chain back to the TV.
If the device chain is looped, the TV may not work properly with the
other devices in the chain.
• Always place devices with the slowest communication
speed at the end of each chain. If a device with a slower
communication speed is placed ahead of a faster device in the
chain, the signal from the slower device will interfere with the signal
from the faster device. To determine the communication speed of
an IEEE1394 device, look for an “S” number near the device’s
IEEE1394 connector. The higher the “S” number, the faster the
device. If your device is not marked with an “S” number, look in the
device’s user manual or call the device manufacturer’s technical
support number.

Setup

• If your IEEE1394 device has a two-position power
switch, always place the device at the end of the chain
and turn ON the power switch when any device is used.
If the power switch is OFF, it will interfere with signals from devices
behind it in the chain.

Installation
Sleep Timer
On/Off Timer
PC Settings
HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

HDMI 2 Audio

Auto

Slide Show Interval

2 Sec

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

• The maximum length for an IEEE1394 cable between
each device is 15 feet.

EXIT Exit

3. Open the Devices menu, highlight IEEE1394 Devices, and
press ENTER.

Devices
IEEE1394 Devices

• The transmission capability of IEEE1394 cable used with this TV
must be S400 (400 Mbps maximum).

TheaterNet Devices

Navigate

• This TV is an IEEE1394A device. The IEEE1394B protocol is faster
and intended to allow for longer distances between devices and
multi-room systems. IEEE1394A–to–IEEE1394B converters
(available at some electronics suppliers) may allow compatibility of
IEEE1394B devices with your existing IEEE1394A devices.

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

4. Highlight the device you want to edit and press ENTER.
IEEE1394 Device Management
Brand

Type

Label

Analog Input Used Connected

TOSHIBA

AVHD

MY DEVICE

None

No

Reset
Done

5. Follow the on-screen prompts to modify the device
information.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_015-030_4250HPX95

27
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:00 AM

27

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

G-LINK™ connection
• This connection is necessary for the TV Guide On Screen™ system to work with your cable box to receive program listings and to
enable the TV Guide On Screen™ recording features with your VCR.
• This connection is not necessary for AVHD or D-VHS recording devices. See pages 26 and 55 for further details.

After you connect your devices to the TV, you will need to connect the G-LINK ™ cable (either of the dual-wand IR blaster cables
included with your TV) from your VCR and Cable box (if applicable) to the G-LINK™ terminal on the TV.
Note: TV Guide On Screen™ program data is available through the ANT-1 and ANT-2 antenna inputs and also through the VIDEO 1 inputs if you
have a cable box connected to VIDEO 1. TV Guide On Screen™ program data is not available through any other inputs on this TV. See the
connection information on pages 15–30.

The G-LINK™ connection is necessary to enable the following features of your TV Guide On Screen™ system:
• If you have a Cable box, you need to connect the G-LINK ™ cable from the Cable box to the G-LINK™ terminal to receive the
TV Guide On Screen™ program listings for your Cable service.
• If you have a VCR, you need to connect the G-LINK™ cable from the VCR to the G-LINK™ terminal to use the TV Guide
On Screen™ recording features.
To connect to the G-LINK™ terminal:
1. Locate the infrared sensor on the front of your VCR or
Cable box. The sensor is marked on some devices.*
2. Align one of the G-LINK™ (IR blaster) cable’s wands about
1 inch away from the infrared sensor on the front of the
VCR and attach it using double-sided mounting tape.
If you have a Cable box, attach the other wand in a similar
manner. (See illustration at right.)

Front of Cable box

Front of VCR

Note: If you do not have a Cable box, coil the second wand
with a rubber band and leave it behind the TV.

3. Plug the G-LINK™ (IR blaster) cable’s plug into the TV’s
G-LINK™ terminal.
For details on setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system:
See Chapter 5.

Infrared
sensor
G-LINK™ (IR blaster) cable wand
(approx. 1 inch from device)
TV back panel

For details on using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive
program guide:
See Chapter 7.
*If you cannot locate the device’s infrared sensor:
1. Turn OFF the device.
2. Starting at the lower left corner of the device, place the end of the
device’s remote control (with the infrared emitter) so it touches the
front of the device and press POWER. (Do not use the TV’s remote
control for this step.)
3. If the device turns on, the point at which the remote control touched
the device is the location of the sensor.
4. If the device does not turn on, move the remote control slightly to the
right and press POWER again.
5. Repeat step 4 until you locate the device’s infrared sensor.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

28
#01E_015-030_4250HPX95

28
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:00 AM

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Connecting a personal computer (PC)
This connection allows you to view the image of a personal
computer (PC) on the TV screen. When connecting a PC to the
TV, use an analog RGB (15-pin) computer cable and a PC
audio cable.
– To use a PC, set the monitor output resolution on the PC
before connecting it to the TV. The following signals can be
displayed.
• VGA: 640 × 480 @ 60Hz
• SVGA: 800 × 600 @ 60Hz
• XGA: 1024 × 768 @ 60Hz
Other formats or non-standard signals may not be displayed
correctly.
– To display the optimum picture, use the PC setting feature.
(see “Using the PC setting feature” on page 95).

TV back panel

Computer
Audio cable

Signal names for mini D-sub 15 pin
connector

Audio
output

Pin assignment for RGB/PC
terminal
5
10
15
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

1
6
11
Signal name
R
G
B
NC (not connected)
NC
Ground
Ground
Ground
NC
Ground
NC
NC
H-sync
V-sync
NC

Conversion
adapter
(if necessary)
Note:
• Some PC models cannot be connected to this TV.
• An adapter is not needed for computers with a DOS/V compatible mini
D-sub 15-pin terminal.
• Depending on the DVD’s title and the specifications of the PC on which
you are playing the DVD-Video, some scenes may be skipped or you
may not be able to pause during multi-angle scenes.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_015-030_4250HPX95

29
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:01 AM

29

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Connecting a home network
Networking the TV with your home Internet e-mail service to enable remote
scheduling of recordings and reminders
You can network the TV with your home Internet service to remotely schedule recordings and reminders by sending an e-mail to the
TV.
To use this feature, you must have Internet e-mail service in your home and two separate e-mail addresses (your personal e-mail
address and a second e-mail address for use solely by the TV). Contact your ISP (Internet Service Provider) for these services.
Note:
• This feature is only for remotely scheduling recordings and reminders. You will not be able to access the Internet through the TV.
• To configure your TV for remote scheduling, see Chapter 11

Example #1: Networking via DSL modem service

Example #2: Networking via cable modem service

You will need:
 three telephone cables
 three RJ-45 cables
 one telephone cable splitter
 one RJ-45 router
 one DSL modem

You will need:
 three coaxial cables
 three RJ-45 cables
 one coaxial cable splitter
 one RJ-45 router
 one cable modem

[1]

Coaxial cable splitter
[3]

[3]

Telephone cable splitter

To TV (ANT IN or via
Cable Box or VCR)

[1]
Phone jack

To telephone

Coaxial cable jack

[3]

[1]

TV back panel

TV back panel

DSL modem

Cable modem

Router

Router

[2]

[2]

[2]

PC

PC
[2]

[2]

[1] Telephone cable
[2] RJ-45 cable
[3] Coaxial cable

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

30
#01E_015-030_4250HPX95

30
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:01 AM

[2]

3

Using the remote control

Learning about the remote control
The buttons used for operating the TV only are described here. For a
complete list of the remote control’s functions, see the remote control
functional key chart on pages 34–35.
For a list of the buttons that operate the TV Guide On Screen™ system, see
page 59.
POWER turns

the TV on and off.

SLEEP accesses

the sleep timer (page 94).

LIGHT The first press of the LIGHT button lights the keypad and turns on
the Illumination mode. With the Illumination mode on, pressing any key
lights the keypad for 5 seconds (10 seconds if you’re in programming
mode). Subsequent presses of the LIGHT button toggle between turning
the Illumination mode on and off.
Channel Numbers (0–9, –/100) directly

tune channels. The “–” button is used
to tune digital channels (page 76) or to display the favorite channel list
(page 49).

INPUT selects

the video input source (page 72).

MODE cycles through the six remote control device modes: TV, CBL/SAT,
VCR/PVR, DVD, AUDIO1, and AUDIO2. The mode indicator light will
remain lit for a few seconds (page 33).
PIC SIZE cycles

through the five pictures sizes: Natural, TheaterWide 1/2/3,
and Full (page 77).

TheaterNet™ DEVICE displays
TheaterNet™ CTRL accesses

a list of available TheaterNet devices (page 50).

the on-screen IR device control icons (page 51).

MENU accesses

the main TV menu system (pages 40 and 41) or opens a
menu in the TV Guide On Screen™ system (Chapter 7).

TV GUIDE opens

the TV Guide On Screen™ system (Chapter 7).

INFO provides

detailed information on highlighted items in the TV Guide
On Screen™ system (Chapter 7).

ENTER activates highlighted items in the main menu system and the
TV Guide On Screen™ system.

When a menu is on-screen, these buttons select or
adjust programming menus. (Also see x / • on the next page.)

Arrow buttons (yz x •)

CH yz cycles through programmed channels when no menu is on-screen
(page 47) and functions as page up/down when a menu is on-screen or
when the TV Guide On Screen™ system is open (Chapter 7).
VOL yz

adjusts the volume level.

EXIT closes

on-screen menus and the TV Guide On Screen™ system.
Note: The error message “Not
Available” will appear if you press a
key for a function that is not available

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_031-039_4250HPX95

31
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:02 AM

31

Chapter 3: Using the remote control

Learning about the remote control (continued)
CH RTN returns

to the last viewed channel (page 76), or stops the picture viewer slide show

(page 103).
Live returns viewing of the TV back to the live program, while continuing to record to the
Toshiba Symbio™ AVHD recorder (pages 26 and 55).
RECALL displays TV
MUTE reduces

setting information on-screen (page 97).

or turns off the sound (page 90).

TV/VCR selects TV

mode to view one program while recording another.

jump forward and backward one day in the TV Guide On Screen™
listings (Chapter 7).
SKIP SS| and |TT
LIST displays

the Toshiba Symbio™ AVHD recorder play list (if available) (page 26).

FAV CH yz tunes
HOME (

to the next higher/lower favorite channel (page 49).

) accesses

the home function of the channel browser feature (page 75)

x/
• While watching TV, these buttons open the channel browser banner and tune
to the previous/next channel in the channel history (page 75). (Also see “Arrow buttons”
on previous page.)

the POP feature on and off (page 81) or locks/unlocks the TV Guide On Screen™
video window.
SPLIT turns

PIC MODE selects

the picture mode (page 84).

FAV SCAN accesses
FREEZE accesses

the favorite channel search function (page 83).

the freeze feature (page 83).

Remote control effctive range
For optimum performance, aim the remote control directly at the TV and make sure there
is no obstruction between the remote control and the TV.

Point remote control
toward remote sensor
on front of TV.
16.4 ft (5m)

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

32
#01E_031-039_4250HPX95

32
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:03 AM

Chapter 3: Using the remote control

Installing the remote control batteries
To install the remote control batteries:
Caution: Always dispose of batteries in a designated disposal location. Never
throw batteries into a fire.

1. Slide the battery cover off the back of the remote control.

Caution:
Never throw batteries into a fire.
Note:
• Be sure to use AA size batteries.
• Dispose of batteries in a designated disposal area.
• Batteries should always be disposed of with the
environment in mind. Always dispose of batteries in
accordance with applicable laws and regulations.

2. Install two “AA” size alkaline batteries. Match the + and – symbols on
the batteries to the symbols on the battery compartment.

• If the remote control does not operate correctly, or if
the operating range becomes reduced, replace
batteries with new ones.
• When necessary to replace batteries in the remote
control, always replace both batteries with new ones.
Never mix battery types or use new and used batteries
in combination.

3. Slide the battery cover on to the remote control until the lock snaps.

• Always remove batteries from remote control if they
are dead or if the remote control is not to be used for
an extended period of time. This will prevent battery
acid from leaking into the battery compartment.

Using the remote control MODE button to control your other devices
Your TV remote control has one dedicated TV mode and five programmable
multi-brand modes: CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, DVD, AUDIO 1, and AUDIO 2. The
default device modes and programmable device modes are listed below.
Note: The TV remote control is preprogrammed to operate most Toshiba devices. If
you own a non-Toshiba device or a Toshiba device that the remote control is not
preprogrammed to operate, you will need to program the remote control. See
“Programming the remote control to operate your other devices” on page 36.

MODE
1) TV
2) CBL/SAT
3) VCR/PVR
4) DVD
5) AUDIO 1
6) AUDIO 2

Number (1-6)
MODE

Default device mode control (before programming)
Toshiba TV
Toshiba Satellite receiver
Toshiba VCR
Toshiba DVD
Pioneer Audio receiver
Pioneer LD

MODE
Device mode control after programming
1) TV
Toshiba TV
2) CBL/SAT
3) VCR/PVR
4) DVD
Multi-brand video/audio devices
5) AUDIO 1
6) AUDIO 2

Note:
Although your new TV’s remote control includes
codes for many devices, it may not include
codes for some or all of the features on certain
devices you wish to control. If you are unable to
program the TV’s remote control to operate
your device or some of the features on that
device, use the device’s remote control or the
controls on the device.

You can directly select the device mode by pressing the corresponding
number button (1-6) while pressing the MODE button.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_031-039_4250HPX95

33
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:03 AM

33

Chapter 3: Using the remote control

Remote Control functional key chart
Toshiba TV
Cable
Satellite
VCR
DVD/LD
Receiver
CD
(TV)
(CBL/SAT) (CBL/SAT)
(AUDIO)
(AUDIO)
MODE
Remote control device mode selection
LIGHT
Lights the remote key, and toggles between enabled and disabled Illumination mode.*1
SLEEP
Sleep timer ------------POWER
Power
Power
Power
Power
Power
Power
Power
1
Digit 1
Digit 1
Digit 1
Digit 1
Digit 1
AV input 1 Digit 1
2
Digit 2
Digit 2
Digit 2
Digit 2
Digit 2
AV input 2 Digit 2
3
Digit 3
Digit 3
Digit 3
Digit 3
Digit 3
AV input 3 Digit 3
4
Digit 4
Digit 4
Digit 4
Digit 4
Digit 4
AV input 4 Digit 4
5
Digit 5
Digit 5
Digit 5
Digit 5
Digit 5
CD
Digit 5
6
Digit 6
Digit 6
Digit 6
Digit 6
Digit 6
Tuner
Digit 6
7
Digit 7
Digit 7
Digit 7
Digit 7
Digit 7
Phono
Digit 7
8
Digit 8
Digit 8
Digit 8
Digit 8
Digit 8
Cassette
Digit 8
9
Digit 9
Digit 9
Digit 9
Digit 9
Digit 9
Aux
Digit 9
0
Digit 0
Digit 0
Digit 0
Digit 0
Digit 0
--Digit 0, 10
100/–
– (digital
--– (sub
100
+10
----- separator)
channel)
INPUT
TV/Video
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
select
PIC SIZE
Selects the
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
image shape.
MENU/
Menu/
--Action,
--Menu
----ACTION
Guide Menu
Menu
TV GUIDE/SETUP TV Guide --Guide
--DVD setup ----INFO/TITLE Guide Info --INFO
--TITLE=
----Top menu
TheaterNet
TheaterNet ------Subtitle
----DEVICE/SUB TITLE Device
TheaterNet
TheaterNet ------Audio
----CTRL/AUDIO
Control
ENTER
Enter
--Enter, Select --Enter
----y
Menu select --Menu select --Menu select ----up
up
up
z
Menu select --Menu select --Menu select ----down
down
down
x•
Menu select --Menu select --Menu select ----left/right
left/right
left/right
EXIT/
Exit
--Exit
--DVD clear ----DVD CLEAR
CH yz
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
--Channel
--PAGE +/–
up/down, up/down
up/down
up/down
up/down
Page up/down
VOL yz
Volume
Volume
Volume
Volume
Volume
Volume
Volume
up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2
CH RTN/
Previous
Previous
Previous
--DVD
----DVD RTN
channel
channel
channel
return
Live
Live
------------RECALL
On-screen ------On-screen ----display
display

PVR
(VCR)

Key Label

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

34
#01E_031-039_4250HPX95

34
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:04 AM

--Power
Digit 1
Digit 2
Digit 3
Digit 4
Digit 5
Digit 6
Digit 7
Digit 8
Digit 9
Digit 0
--TV
TV
Menu
Guide
INFO
ADVANCE
--Enter
Menu select
up
Menu select
down
Menu select
left/right
EXIT
Channel
up/down
Volume
up/down*2
--Live TV
---

Chapter 3: Using the remote control

Remote Control functional key chart (continued)
Key Label
MUTE
SLOW

x
•

SKIP

x
•

REW
PAUSE/STEP
PLAY
FF
TV/VCR
DISC/AM/FM
STOP
REC
LIST
FAV CH yz
HOME
SPLIT
PIC MODE
FAV SCAN
FREEZE

Toshiba TV
Cable
Satellite
VCR
(TV)
(CBL/SAT) (CBL/SAT)
Sound mute*2 Sound mute*2 Sound mute*2 Sound mute*2
Slow FWD
-----------------Skip FWD
---------------Skip REW
Rewind
----Rewind
Pause
----Pause
Play
----Play
Fast FWD ----Fast FWD
----TV/SAT
TV/VCR
--------Stop
----Stop
REC Menu ----Record
(Single Click)
(Double Click)
LIST
------FAV channel ------up/down
HOME
------Split
TV
TV
TV
PIC MODE
TV
TV
TV
FAV SCAN ------Freeze
TV
TV
TV

DVD/LD

Receiver
CD
(AUDIO)
(AUDIO)
Sound mute*2 Sound mute*2 Sound mute*2
Slow FWD
----------Slow REW
Skip FWD
Skip FWD
-----Skip REW
Skip REW
Rewind
--Rewind
Pause
--Pause
Play
--Play
Fast FWD --Fast FWD
------Disc shift
AM/FM
Disc shift
Stop
--Stop
-----------

-----

---

-----

--TV
TV

---

--TV
TV

--TV

PVR
(VCR)
Sound mute*2
Slow FWD
-------Rewind
Pause
Play
Fast FWD
Reverse
Replay
Stop
Record
(Double Click)
-------

TV
TV
---

TV

TV
TV
---

TV

TV

Note:
• “---” = key does not send a signal.
• “

TV” = key will operate the TV.

1

* Backlight key is toggle. Does not send IR signal.
* 2 Volume will punch through to TV by default. When the volume is unlocked, all the devices will have their own volume if their ID has
volume data. The AUDIO modes (receiver, CD) will have their own volume if volume lock is done to TV, CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, or DVD
mode. See “Using the volume lock feature” on page 37.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_031-039_4250HPX95

35
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:04 AM

35

Chapter 3: Using the remote control

Programming the remote control to operate your other devices
Device code setup
1. Refer to the multi-brand remote control device code table
on pages 38 and 39 to find the code for the brand of your
device.
If more than one code is listed, try each one separately until
you find one that works.
2. Press MODE until the Mode indicator for the device
(CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, DVD, AUDIO 1, AUDIO 2) lights
up.
3. While holding down the RECALL button, press the
Channel Number buttons to enter the four-digit code for
your brand of device. If a valid code is entered, the mode
indicator will blink twice. If an invalid code is entered, the
mode indicator will blink one long blink.
4. Point the remote control at the device and press POWER to
test the code.
If the device responds to the remote control:
You have entered the correct code.
If the device does not respond to the remote control:
You may have entered the wrong code. Repeat steps 3
and 4 using another code.
Note: In addition to POWER, confirm that all necessary keys
on the TV remote control operate your device. If some keys
are not operational, repeat the device code setup using
another code (if other codes are listed for your device). If,
after trying all listed codes, the necessary keys do not operate
your device, use the device’s original remote control.

5. To control the TV, repeatedly press MODE to select “TV.”
Note:
• Although the TV remote control includes codes for many devices, it may
not include codes for some or all of the features on certain devices you
want to control. If you are unable to program the TV remote control to
operate your device or some of the features on that device, use the
device’s remote control or the controls on the device.

Searching and sampling the code of
a device (8500)
If you do not know the device code for a particular device, you
can cycle the remote control through the available codes for that
device mode and sample the functions to find the code that
operates the target device. The keys available to be sampled,
provided they are applicable to that mode, are POWER, 1,
VOL y, CH y, and PLAY. Invalid keys will be ignored while in
program mode.
To cycle through each available device code and sample its
functions:
1. Press MODE to select the mode you want to set up.
2. While holding down RECALL, press 8 – 5 – 0 – 0. The
remote control will enter program mode.
3. Point the remote control at the target device and press
POWER (or other function buttons that are available to be
sampled).
4. If the device responds to the remote control:
Press RECALL to store the device code. The mode
indicator will blink twice and the remote control will exit
the program mode.
If the device does not respond to the remote control:
Press y, and then press POWER. Repeat this step until
the device responds to the remote control, and then press
RECALL.
Note: When a search cycle is completed, the mode
indicator will blink three times. The remote control will
begin to cycle through the available codes again. If no
key is pressed within 10 seconds while programming, the
remote control will exit the program mode and return to
the previous code.

POWER

• Each time you change the batteries you will need to reprogram the
remote control.

Numbers
MODE

• Some newer VCRs respond to either of two codes. These VCRs have a
switch labeled “VCR1/VCR2.” If your VCR has this kind of switch and
does not respond to the codes for your VCR brand, set the switch to the
other position (“VCR1” or “VCR2”) and reprogram the remote control.

y

CH y
VOL y
RECALL

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

36
#01E_031-039_4250HPX95

36
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:04 AM

Chapter 3: Using the remote control

Programming the remote control to operate your other devices (continued)
Using the volume lock feature (8000)

Operational feature reset (8900)

For the TV, CABLE/SAT, VCR, and DVD modes, the volume
controls (VOL yz and MUTE) can be locked to the selected
device mode. This feature does not apply to the AUDIO 1 and
AUDIO 2 modes.

This feature clears all programmed features not related to
“Device code setup” and resets the Volume Lock to “TV.”
To reset the features:
While holding down the RECALL button, press 8 –9 –0 –
0. The Mode indicator will blink two times, and then pause
and blink two more times.

To lock the volume controls to always control the
CABLE/SAT device volume (for example):
1. Repeatedly press MODE to select CABLE/SAT mode.
2. While holding down the RECALL button, press 8 – 0 – 0 – 0.
3. Press VOL y.
The CABLE/SAT mode light will blink two times (locked).
To reset the volume controls to the original device mode:
1. While holding down RECALL, press 8 – 0 – 0 – 0.
2. Press VOL z.
The mode light will blink four times (unlocked).

Numbers
MODE

VOL yz
RECALL

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_031-039_4250HPX95

37
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:05 AM

37

Chapter 3: Using the remote control

Multi-brand remote control device codes
VCRs/PVRs
Brand
ADMIRAL
AIWA
AKAI
AUDIO DYNAMIC
BELL&HOWELL
BROKSONIC
CANON
CCE
CITIZEN
CRAIG
CURTIS MATHES
DAEWOO
DBX
DIMENSIA
EMERSON
FISHER
FUNAI
GE
GO VIDEO
GOLDSTAR
GRADIENTE
HITACHI
INSTANT REPLAY
JENSEN
JVC
KENWOOD
LG
LXI
MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MARTA
MEMOREX
MGA
MINOLTA
MITSUBISHI
MULTITECH
NEC
OLYMPIC
OPTIMUS
ORION
PANASONIC
PENNEY
PENTAX

Code
0135
0127, 0132, 0181
0129, 0114, 0115,
0116
0139, 0111
0105, 0113
0120, 0126, 0180
0123, 0125
0143
0106
0105, 0129, 0106
0145, 0124, 0127
0143, 0101, 0124,
0175
0139, 0110, 0111
0145
0143, 0126, 0119,
0103, 0125, 0142,
0120, 0118
0105, 0108, 0109,
0107, 0113, 0165
0127, 0126, 0120,
0134
0133, 0145, 0124
0137, 0151, 0163,
0149, 0150, 0182
0106
0170, 0171, 0168,
0134, 0156
0123, 0145, 0100,
0127, 0168
0124, 0123
0139
0139, 0110, 0111,
0134, 0157, 0158,
0184, 0185, 7104
0139, 0110, 0106,
0111
0159
0127, 0106, 0100,
0107, 0108, 0105,
0109
0131, 0123, 0124,
0173
0139, 0110, 0111
0106
0124, 0109
0138, 0140, 0147,
0148, 0141, 0142
0100, 0145
0138, 0140, 0147,
0148, 0141, 0142,
0161, 0164
0147, 0127, 0104
0139, 0110, 0111,
0134
0124, 0123
0128, 0121, 0135,
0106
0126, 0120, 0132
0123, 0124, 0121,
0122
0124, 0100, 0145,
0105, 0139, 0110,
0111
0100, 0111, 0145

VCRs/PVRs (cont.)

Cable boxes

Brand
PHILCO

Brand
ABC
ARCHER
CABLEVIEW
CITIZEN
CURTIS
DIAMOND
EAGLE
EASTERN
GCBRAND
GEMINI
G.I./JERROLD

Code
0131, 0124, 0127,
0123, 0126, 0120,
0143
PHILIPS
0131, 0123, 0124,
0173
PIONEER
0123
PROSCAN
0145, 0100, 0123,
0124, 0131, 0146,
0101, 0102, 0133
QUASAR
0121, 0122, 0123,
0124
RADIO SHACK
0133, 0124, 0105,
0136, 0109, 0140,
0127
RCA
0133, 0145, 0100,
0123, 0124, 0131,
0146, 0101, 0102,
0170, 0172, 0174,
0176, 0183
REALISTIC
0124, 0105, 0136,
0109, 0140, 0127
Replay TV
7102
SAMSUNG
0137, 0102, 0104,
0133
SAMTRON
0163
SANSUI
0139, 0126, 0120,
0152
SANYO
0105, 0109, 0113
SCOTT
0101, 0102, 0104,
0109, 0138, 0140,
0147, 0148, 0126
SEARS
0105, 0106, 0107,
0108, 0100
SHARP
0135, 0136, 0167,
0162
SHINTOM
0117
SIGNATURE 2000
0127, 0135
SINGER
0117
SONY
0128, 0129, 0130,
0153, 0154, 0155,
7101
SV2000
0127
SYLVANIA
0131, 0123, 0124,
0127, 0178
SYMPHONIC
0127, 0168, 0177
TASHIRO
0106
TATUNG
0139, 0110, 0111
TEAC
0139, 0110, 0127,
0111
TECHNICS
0121, 0122, 0123,
0124
TEKNICA
0124, 0127, 0112
THOMSON
0179, 0183
Tivo
7100, 7101
TOSHIBA
0101, 0146, 0166,
0160
VECTOR RESEARCH 0111
WARDS
0135, 0136, 0109,
0144, 0106
YAMAHA
0105, 0139, 0110,
0111
ZENITH
0144, 0106, 0169,
0180

HAMLIN
HITACHI
MACOM
MAGNAVOX
MEMOREX
MOVIETIME
OAK
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
PULSAR
PUSER
RCA
REALISTIC
REGAL
REGENCY
REMBRANT
SAMSUNG
S.A.
SLMARK
SPRUCER
STARGATE
TELECAPTION
TELEVIEW
TEXSCAN
TOCOM
TOSHIBA
UNIKA
UNIVERSAL
VIDEOWAY
VIEWSTAR
ZENITH
ZENITH/DRAKE
SATELLITE

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

38
#01E_031-039_4250HPX95

38
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:05 AM

Code
1124
1132, 1125
1105, 1132
1122, 1105
1112, 1113
1124, 1132, 1125
1129
1134
1132, 1105
1122, 1143
1119, 1124, 1125,
1126, 1127, 1120,
1121, 1122, 1111,
1123, 1152
1140, 1141, 1142,
1145, 1118, 1112
1103, 1124
1103, 1104, 1105,
1108
1133
1130
1132, 1105
1139, 1137, 1102
1109, 1110, 1114,
1151, 1153
1128, 1129, 1130,
1106, 1107, 1150,
1131
1101, 1116
1105, 1132
1132
1115
1132
1112, 1118, 1140,
1141, 1142, 1145,
1149
1134
1137, 1132, 1105,
1138
1105
1111, 1112, 1113
1105, 1101
1105, 1110
1132, 1105
1148
1101, 1105
1144
1135, 1136, 1147
1104, 1146
1132, 1125
1122, 1132
1106
1129, 1130
1117, 1100
1100

Chapter 3: Using the remote control

Multi-brand remote control device codes

(continued)

Receivers (cont.)

CD players
Brand
ADMIRAL
AIWA
CARVER
DENON
EMERSON
FISHER
GARRARD
HARMAN/KARDON
HITACHI
JENSEN
JVC
KENWOOD
LXI
MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MACINTOSH
NAKAMICHI
ONKYO
OPTIMUS
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
QUASAR
RCA
SANSUI
SANYO
SCOTT
SHARP
SHERWOOD
SONY
SOUNDE-SIGH
TEAC
TECHNICS
VICTOR
YAMAHA

Code
6126
6133, 6135
6129
6142, 6151
6139
6105, 6106
6117
6120, 6121, 6123,
6119
6107
6134
6140, 6141, 6145,
6148, 6151
6100, 6101, 6111,
6145
6136
6129, 6132
6129
6121
6110
6114, 6115
6108, 6118, 6120,
6122
6124, 6125, 6127,
6150
6129, 6130, 6149
6108
6125, 6127, 6124
6147, 6137, 6138,
6131, 6152
6110, 6146, 6113
6105
6110, 6146
6142, 6143
6120
6128
6144
6112, 6116, 6118
6127, 6124, 6125
6140, 6141, 6145
6102, 6103, 6104

Brand
PIONEER
QUASAR
RCA
SANSUI
SHARP
SONY
SOUNDE-SIGH
TEAC
TECHNICS
VICTOR
YAMAHA

Laser disks
Brand

Code

DENON
HITACHI
KENWOOD
MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MITSUBISHI
NEC
PANASONIC

5114
5100
5102, 5103
5101
5114
5114, 5118, 5119
5114
5104, 5105, 5106,
5115
5111
5114
5114
5104, 5105, 5106,
5115
5114
5112
5114, 5117
5113, 5116
5107, 5108, 5109,
5110
5114
5114
5101

PHILIPS
PIONEER
PROSCAN
QUASAR
RCA
SAMSUNG
SANYO
SHARP
SONY
TEAC
TOSHIBA
YAMAHA

Receivers
Brand

DVD players
Code
4105, 4107, 4150
4119, 4118, 4121
4103, 4105, 4127,
4131, 4130, 4149
4103, 4111, 4139
4134, 4137
4122
4138
4112, 4113, 4111,
4110
4121, 4118, 4119
4132, 4133
4101, 4102

Code

ADMIRAL
AIWA
DENON

4120
4125, 4126, 4146
4134, 4135, 4136,
4143
FISHER
4104
GARRARD
4113
HARMAN KARDON 4115, 4123, 4145
JENSEN
4129
JVC
4132, 4133, 4140,
4144
KENWOOD
4100, 4108, 4141,
4142, 4147
MAGNAVOX
4127, 4128
MARANTZ
4124
MCNTOSH
4116
MITSUBISHI
4148
NAKAMICHI
4106, 4117
ONKYO
4109, 4114
OPTIMUS
4103, 4127, 4131,
4130
PANASONIC
4119, 4118, 4121
PHILIPS
4123

Brand
AIWA
APEX
DENON
FERGUSON
HITACHI
JVC
KENWOOD
KONKA
MITSUBISHI
NORDMENDE
ONKYO
ORITRON
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
RAITE
RCA
SABA
SAMPO
SAMSUNG
SHARP
SYLVANIA
SMC
SONY
TECHNICS
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
WAVE
YAMAHA
ZENITH
VIALTA
FUNAI

Satellite receivers
Brand
DISH NETWORK
(Echostar)
ECHOSTAR
EXPRESS VU
G.E.
G.I.(GENERAL
INSTRUMENT)
GRADIENTE
HITACHI
HNS(Hughes)
MAGNAVOX
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PRIMESTAR
PROSCAN
RCA
SONY
STAR CHOICE
TOSHIBA
UNIDEN

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_031-039_4250HPX95

39
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Code
3123
3120
3100, 3117
3101
3111
3109
3115, 3129
3119
3105
3101
3121
3124
3100
3103, 3116
3102
3113
3101, 3106
3101
3114
3110
3108
3132, 3118
3125
3104, 3126, 3127,
3128
3100
3101
3103
3122
3100, 3130
3107, 3112
3131
3132, 3118

7/12/05, 9:05 AM

Code
2105, 2115, 2116,
2117
2105
2105, 2115
2106
2108
2114
2103, 2111, 2112
2103
2101, 2102
2104
2101, 2102, 2118
2108
2106, 2109, 2110,
2113
2106, 2109, 2110,
2113
2107
2103, 2108
2100, 2103, 2119,
2120, 2121, 2122,
2123, 2124, 2125
2101, 2102

39

4

Menu layout and navigation

The illustrations below and on the next page provide a quick overview of your TV’s menu system.

Main menu layout
To open the main menus (illustrated below), press MENU on the remote control or TV side panel.

Applications

➞ TV Guide On Screen™ ➞ Launch Gemstar / TV GUIDE
➞ Audio Player ➞ Launch MP3 audio player
➞ Picture Viewer ➞ Launch the picture viewer
➞ Digital CC / Audio Selector ➞ Launch the ATSC Digital CC Selector
➞ CableCARD™ ➞ Dynamic list of items provided by inserted CableCARD™
(this option is not available if CableCARD™ is not inserted).

Video

➞ Picture Settings ➞ [ Picture Settings Edit Window ]
➞ Advanced Picture Settings ➞ [ Advanced Picture Settings Edit Window ]
➞ Theater Settings ➞ [ Theater Settings Edit Window ]

Audio

➞ Audio Settings ➞ [ Audio Settings Window ]
➞ Advanced Audio Settings ➞ [ Advanced Audio Settings Window ]
➞ Audio Setup ➞ [ Audio Setup Window ]

Preferences

Locks

Setup

➞ Favorite Channels ➞ [ Favorite Channels Edit Window ]
➞ Closed Caption Mode ➞ Off / CC1 / CC2 / CC3 / CC4 / T1 / T2 / T3 / T4
➞ Closed Caption Advanced ➞ [ Advanced Closed Captions Window ]
➞ Input Labeling ➞ [ Input Labeling Edit Window ]
➞ Menu Language ➞ English / Français / Español
➞ Home CH Setup ➞ [ Home channel Setup Window ]

➞ Enable Rating Blocking ➞ Off / On
➞ Edit Rating Limits ➞ [ Edit Rating Limits Edit Window ]
➞ Channels Block ➞ [ Channels Block Edit Window ]
➞ Input Lock ➞ Off / Video / Video+
➞ Front Panel Lock ➞ Off / On
➞ GameTimer™ ➞ Off / 30 Min / 60 Min / 90 Min / 120 Min
➞ New PIN Code ➞ [ New PIN Code Entry Window ]

➞ Installation ➞ [ Installation sub menu is launched (see page 38 for details) ]
➞ Sleep Timer ➞ [ Sleep Timer Edit Window ]
➞ On/Off Timer ➞ [ On/Off Timer window ]
➞ PC Settings ➞ [ PC Settings Edit Window ]
➞ HDMI 1 Audio ➞ Auto / Digital / Analog
➞ HDMI 2 Audio ➞ Auto / Digital / Analog
➞ Slide Show Interval ➞ 2 sec. / 5 sec. / 10 sec. / 15 sec. / 20 sec.
➞ AVHD Skip Time ➞ 1 min. / 3 min. / 5 min. / 15 min.
➞ Long Life ➞ Picture Shift ➞ On / Off
➞ Gray Level ➞ 1 / 2 / 3
➞ Reverse
➞ White
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

40
#01E_040-041_4250HPX95

40
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:05 AM

Chapter 4: Menu layout and navigation

Setup / Installation menu layout
To open the Installation menu (illustrated below), press MENU on the remote control or TV side panel, open the Setup menu, select
Installation, and press ENTER.
From Main Menu/Setup
menu, select “Installation”
➔
sub-menu

Terrestrial

➞ Input Configuration ➞ [ Input Configuration Window ]
➞ Channel Program ➞ ANT1
➞ [ Scan for new channels on desired Antenna ]
➞ ANT2
➞ Channel Add/Delete ➞ [ Channel Add / Delete Window ]
➞ Signal Meter ➞ [ Signal Meter Window ]

}

Devices

➞ IEEE1394 Devices ➞ [ IEEE1394 Device Management Window ]
➞ TheaterNet Devices ➞ [ TheaterNet Setup Window ]

Network

➞ Basic Network setup
➞ Recording E-mail setup
➞ Home File server setup

TV Guide On Screen™ Setup ➞ Start ➞ [ Launches TV Guide On Screen™ system setup ]

Time and Date ➞ Start Setup ➞ [ Time And Date Setup Window ]

System Status ➞ System Information ➞ [ System Information Window ]

Navigating the menu system
You can use the buttons on the remote
control or TV side panel to access and
navigate your TV’s on-screen menu system.
• Press MENU to open the menu
system.
• Use the up/down/left/right arrow
buttons (yzx •) on the remote
control or TV side panel to move in
the corresponding direction in a menu.
• Press ENTER to save your menu
settings or select a highlighted item. (A
highlighted menu item appears in a
different color in the menu.)
• All menus close automatically if you do
not make a selection within 60 seconds,
except the signal meter menu which
closes automatically after 5 minutes.
• To close a menu instantly, press EXIT.

Remote control

TV side panel

y
z
•
x
MENU (ENTER*)
EXIT

ENTER

*The MENU button on the TV
side panel functions as the
ENTER button when a menu is
on-screen.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_040-041_4250HPX95

41
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

MENU

7/12/05, 9:06 AM

x

y
z

•

EXIT

41

5

TV Guide On Screen™ setup

Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system
The TV Guide On Screen™ system in your TV is a no-fee
interactive program guide that uses the information you enter
during the following setup process to provide you with a
channel lineup and program listings for your area. The listings
are automatically updated several times a day.

Configuring the location of your TV
Screen 1: Select the TV location (USA or Canada), and then
press ENTER.

Note:
• You must first set up your TV according to the applicable
connection instructions in Chapter 2.
• If you connected a Toshiba
AVHD Recorder, you
must perform the following TV Guide On Screen™ system setup
in order to use the Symbio’s full functionality. See pages 26 and
52 for further details about AVHD digital recorders.
TM

To set up the TV Guide On Screen™ system:
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER.

Screen 2: Enter the ZIP code (U.S.A.) or postal code (Canada)
for your location (use the Number buttons on the remote
control for numbers and the yz buttons for letters), and
then press ENTER. Screen 3 appears.

Setup
Installation
Sleep Timer
On/Off Timer
PC Settings
HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

HDMI 2 Audio

Auto

Slide Show Interval

2 Sec

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

3. A new set of Installation
menu icons appears
on-screen (see illustration
at right). Open the
TV Guide On Screen™
Setup menu, highlight
Start, and press ENTER.

Screen 3: Do you have Cable service connected?
If you select Yes (and press ENTER), screen 4 appears.
If you select No (and press ENTER), screen 12 appears.

TV Guide On Screen Setup
Start

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

4. The following screen appears. Highlight “Set up TV Guide
On Screen™ now” and press ENTER to continue.

Screen 4: Do you have a Cable box connected?
If you select Yes (and press ENTER), screen 5 appears.
If you select No (and press ENTER), screen 13 appears.

5. The following screen appears. Press ENTER to continue.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

42
#01E_042-045_4250HPX95

42
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:07 AM

Chapter 5: TV Guide On Screen™ setup

Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system (continued)
Screen 5: Which TV input is your cable box plugged into?
If you select ANT 1, screen 6 appears.
If you select Video 1, screen 7 appears.

Screen 6: Select the channel your TV is tuned to when using
your cable box, and then press ENTER. Screen 7 appears.

Screen 7: The on-screen diagram shows the correct way to
connect your Cable box to the G-LINK™ terminal on the
TV. Make sure the G-LINK™ cable is installed properly.
For additional details, see page 28.
Press ENTER to display screen 8.

Screen 8: Highlight your Cable box brand, and then press
ENTER to display screen 9.

Screen 9: To allow the TV Guide On Screen™ system to find
the correct code for your brand of Cable box, tune your
Cable box to channel 02, leave the Cable box and TV ON,
and then press ENTER. Screen 10 appears.

Screen 10: The TV Guide On Screen™ system will test the code
for the brand of Cable box you selected. Do not press any
keys on the TV, remote control, or Cable box until the
testing process is completed. When testing is completed,
screen 11 appears.

Screen 11: If your Cable box tuned itself to channel 09 after
testing, select Yes and press ENTER. If you selected ANT 1
in screen 5, screen 13 appears. If you selected Video 1 in
screen 5, screen 12 appears.

If your Cable box did not tune itself to channel 09 after
testing and you want to test the same code again, select
“Test this code again” and press ENTER.
If you want to test a different code, select No and press
ENTER. Screen 10 appears.
Note: Many cable boxes require testing more than one code.

(Continued on next page)

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_042-045_4250HPX95

43
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:07 AM

43

Chapter 5: TV Guide On Screen™ setup

Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system (continued)
Screen 12: Do you have an antenna connected?
Select either Yes or No, and then press ENTER. Screen 13
appears.
Note: If you selected NO in screen 3, you must select YES in
this screen to receive a channel lineup and program listings.

Screen 16: The on-screen diagram shows the correct way to
connect your VCR to the G-LINK™ terminal on the TV.
Make sure the G-LINK™ cable is installed properly. For
additional details, see page 28.
Press ENTER to display screen 17.

Screen 17: Select your VCR brand, and then press ENTER.
Screen 18 appears.

Screen 13: Are the settings correct?
If you select Yes, screen 14 appears.
If you select No, screen 1 appears.

Screen 14: Congratulations! You have completed basic
TV Guide On Screen™ system setup.

Screen 18: Turn on your VCR, insert a tape (either blank or
previously recorded), and then press PLAY. Screen 19
appears.

Note: Read the on-screen information regarding the amount
of time it may take for listing information to download from
the TV Guide On Screen™ service.

Press ENTER to display screen 15.

Screen 19: The TV Guide On Screen™ system will test the code
for the brand of VCR you selected. Do not press any keys
on the TV, remote control, or VCR until the testing process
is completed. When testing is completed, screen 20 appears.
Screen 15: Is a VCR connected?
If you select Yes, screen 16 appears.
If you select No, screen 21 appears.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

44
#01E_042-045_4250HPX95

44
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:08 AM

Chapter 5: TV Guide On Screen™ setup

Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system (continued)
Screen 20: If your VCR stopped playing the tape after testing,
select Yes and press ENTER. Screen 21 appears.
If your VCR did not
stop playing the tape
after testing and you
want to test the same
code again, select
“Test this code again”
and press ENTER.
If you want to test a
different code, select No and press ENTER. Screen 19
appears.
Did your VCR stop playing?

Note: Many VCRs require testing more than one code.

Screen 21: Review the setup information displayed on your TV
screen (an example is shown below).
If the information on
your TV screen is
correct for your setup,
select “Yes, end setup”
and press ENTER.
Screen 22 appears.
If the information is
incorrect, select “No,
repeat setup process” and press ENTER. Screen 1 appears.
Screen 22: Congratulations! You have successfully completed
TV Guide On Screen™ system setup.
Press ENTER to
display screen 23.

Screen 23: This screen provides helpful information on using
your TV Guide On Screen™ system.
Press ENTER to exit
the TV Guide On
Screen™ setup and
watch TV.

TV Guide On Screen™ Reminder
The TV Guide On Screen™ system receives program listing
data through your Cable or over-the-air video signal. In
order to receive regular program listing updates, remember
to do the following:
1. Leave the TV in standby mode when it is not in use
by turning it OFF but leaving the power cord
plugged in.
2. If you have a Cable box connected, leave it ON.
3. If you have a VCR connected, turn it OFF when not
in use. (Do not unplug the power cord.) See page 17
for VCR connection instructions.
4. If you have more than one Cable system in your area,
you may be prompted to select which Cable system’s
program data to download. If so prompted, follow the
on-screen instructions.
Note: If the TV power cord is unplugged for an
extended period of time, it may take up to 24 hours with
the TV in standby mode (power cord plugged in and
power OFF) to download the TV Guide On Screen™
program schedule. It may take up to a week before an
entire program schedule is available.

Turning off the TV Guide On Screen™
automatic display feature
After you set up the TV Guide On Screen™ system, the
program guide will display automatically (by default) when
you turn on the TV. To turn off the automatic program guide:
1. Press TV GUIDE on the remote control to open the
TV Guide On Screen™ system (if it is not already open).
2. Use the x • buttons to select the Setup menu.
3. Use the yz buttons to select “Change Default Options”,
and then press ENTER.
4. Use the yz buttons to select “General Defaults”, and
then press ENTER.
5. Set the “Auto Guide” option to Off.
6. Use the yz buttons to select Done, and then press
ENTER.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_042-045_4250HPX95

45
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:08 AM

45

6

Setting up your TV

For menu navigation instructions, see Chapter 4.

Selecting the menu language
You can choose from three different languages (English, French
and Spanish) for the on-screen display of menus and messages.
(The TV Guide On Screen™ menus are in English, regardless of
the language selected in this menu.)
To select the menu language:
1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.
2. Highlight Menu Language and press •.
3. Press y or z to select your preferred menu language and
press ENTER.

Configuring the antenna input
sources
To configure the ANT 1 and ANT 2 input sources:
1. Press MENU and open
the Setup menu.
Setup
Installation
2. Highlight Installation
Sleep Timer
and press ENTER. (A
On/Off Timer
PC Settings
new set of Installation
Auto
HDMI 1 Audio
menu icons will appear
HDMI 2 Audio
Auto
Slide Show Interval
2 Sec
on-screen, as shown in
step 3 below.)
Navigate

Preferences
Closed Caption Mode

Off

Français

Closed Caption Advanced

Español

Input Labeling
Menu Language

English

Home CH Setup

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

3. Open the Terrestrial menu, highlight Input Configuration,
and press ENTER.

English

Favorite Channels

Select

EXIT Exit

4. Press EXIT to close the Preferences menu.

Note: The Terrestrial menu may not be accessible (items will
be “grayed out”) in some instances (for example, if a cable
box is connected to the ANT 1 input or if one of the VIDEO
modes is the current input during TV Guide On Screen™
setup).

Terrestrial
Input Configuration
Channel Program
Channel Add/Delete
Signal Meter

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

4. Press x or • to select the input source (Cable or Antenna)
for the ANT 1 input on the TV.
Note: If a cable box is connected to the ANT 1 input during
TV Guide On Screen™ setup, the entire Terrestrial menu will
not be accessible, including the input source for ANT 1, which
will automatically display “Cable Box.”

5. Press z and then x or • to select the input source (Cable
or antenna) for the ANT 2 input on the TV, if applicable. If
you have not connected anything to ANT 2, skip this step.
Input Configuration
Antenna 1 In

Cable

Antenna 2 In

Antenna
Cancel

Done

6. To save your new settings, highlight Done and press
ENTER. To revert to your original settings, highlight
Cancel and press ENTER.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

46
#01E_046-048_4250HPX95

46
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:09 AM

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

Programming channels into the TV’s channel memory
When you press CHANNEL y or z on the remote control or
TV side panel, your TV will stop only on the channels stored in
the TV’s channel memory.
Follow the steps below to program channels into the TV’s
channel memory.

Programming channels automatically
Your TV can automatically detect all active channels in your area
and store them in its memory. After the channels are
programmed automatically, you can manually add or erase
individual channels.

4. Open the Terrestrial menu, highlight Channel Program,
and press ENTER.
5. Highlight ANT 1 or
ANT 2, depending on
Terrestrial
which antenna input
Input Configuration
Channel Program
you want to program
Channel Add/Delete
channels for, and then
Signal Meter
press ENTER to start
automatic channel
programming.
Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

ANT 1
Antenna
Scanning channels, please wait ...

Note:

52%

• You must configure the antenna input sources before
programming channels (see page 46).
• If the input signal type is set to CABLE for an antenna input, the
automatic channel programming process erases channels that
were previously programmed into the TV’s memory.
• If the input signal type is set to ANTENNA, the automatic
channel programming process does NOT erase channels that
were previously programmed into the TV’s memory, but adds
newly found channels to the existing set of programmed
channels. To remove a channel from the memory, you must
manually delete it (see next page).

Abort

The TV will automatically cycle through all the channels
for the antenna input you selected, and store all active
channels in the channel memory. While the TV is cycling
through the channels, the message “Scanning channels,
please wait” appears (as shown above).
6. To cancel channel programming, either press EXIT or
highlight Abort in the on-screen display and press ENTER.
When channel programming is done, press CHANNEL
y or z to view the programmed channels.

• To tune the TV to a channel not programmed in the channel
memory, you must use the Channel Number buttons on the
remote control.

TV side panel

• Programming channels for an antenna input configured for
CABLE will take substantially longer than for an antenna input
configured for ANTENNA. This is normal; however, once
channel programming is completed, you should not have to
repeat the programming process again unless your Cable TV
service lineup changes significantly.

CHANNEL y
Channel
Numbers

• If you have a CableCARD™ inserted (page 15), channel
programming for ANT 1 is disabled because the CableCARD™
automatically loads the Cable channel list into the TV’s channel
memory.

To program channels automatically:
1. Make sure you have configured the antenna input sources.
See page 46 for details.
2. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
3. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of
Installation menu icons will appear on-screen).

CHANNEL z

MENU
(ENTER)

CHANNEL yz

Setup
Installation
Sleep Timer
On/Off Timer
PC Settings
Auto

HDMI 1 Audio
HDMI 2 Audio

Auto

Slide Show Interval

2 Sec

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_046-048_4250HPX95

47
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:10 AM

47

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

Programming channels into the TV’s channel memory (continued)
Manually adding and deleting channels in
the channel memory
After automatically programming channels into the channel
memory, you can manually add or delete individual channels.
To add or delete channels in the channel memory:
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of
Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in
step 3).

To manually add digital subchannels on a physical channel:
Use the Channel Numbers and the Dash (–/100) on the
remote control to enter the channel number (for example,
56–1).
If the channel is found, the number will be added to the list
and the box will be checked.
If the channel is not found, a message will appear.
To remove a channel from the channel memory:
Highlight the checked box next to the channel number you
want to remove, and then press ENTER to uncheck the
box.

Setup
Installation
Sleep Timer
On/Off Timer
PC Settings
Auto

HDMI 1 Audio
HDMI 2 Audio

Auto

Slide Show Interval

2 Sec

Navigate

To add a channel to the channel memory:
Highlight the unchecked box next to the channel number
you want to add, and then press ENTER to check the box.

Select

CH RTN Back

To save your new settings:
Highlight Done and press ENTER.
EXIT Exit

3. Open the Terrestrial menu, highlight Channel Add/Delete,
and then press ENTER.

Terrestrial

To revert to your original settings:
Highlight Cancel and press ENTER before saving.
To remove all channels from the channel memory:
Highlight Reset and press ENTER, and then highlight
Done and press ENTER.

Input Configuration

Note:

Channel Program
Channel Add/Delete

• This action applies to the current antenna input only. To
delete/add channels on the other input, highlight the input
you want (ANT1 or ANT 2) and press ENTER.

Signal Meter

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

• This action cannot be canceled unless you highlight Cancel
and press ENTER before saving your changes.

EXIT Exit

4. The illustration below left shows channels programmed for
the ANT 1 antenna input. To view the list of channels
programmed for the ANT 2 or Cable box antenna input,
press the y z buttons to highlight either “ANT 2” or
“Cable Box” and press ENTER.
Note: “Cable Box” will appear only if you connected a cable
box to your TV.
Channel Add/Delete
2

ANT 1

Channel Add/Delete

Cable Box

Analog

ANT 1

1

Analog

ANT 1

Digital

ANT 2

2

Analog

ANT 2

2-2

Digital

Cable Box

3

Analog

Cable Box

3

Analog

4

Analog

4

Analog

5

Analog

5

Analog

6

Analog

6

Analog

7

Analog

7

Analog

Reset

8

Analog

Reset

7-1

Digital

Cancel

9

Analog

Cancel

8

Analog

Done

10

Analog

Done

2-1

Channel Add/Delete

ANT 1

2

Analog

ANT 1

2-1

Digital

ANT 2

2-2

Digital

Cable Box

3

Analog

4

Analog

5

Digital

6

Analog

7

Analog

Reset

7-1

Digital

Cancel

8

Analog

Done

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

48
#01E_046-048_4250HPX95

48
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:11 AM

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

Programming your favorite channels
You can program up to 27 channels as favorite channels into
three Favorite Channel sets (nine channels from the ANT 1
input, nine from the ANT 2 input, and nine from the Cable
box input). You can then scan through your favorite channels
only, skipping other channels you do not normally watch.
To add and delete channels in the Favorite Channels sets:
1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.
2. Highlight Favorite Channels and press ENTER.
3. Use the yz buttons to select either ANT 1, ANT 2, or
Cable box and press ENTER.
4. Highlight Edit and press ENTER.
Favorite Channels

Preferences

ANT 1

Favorite Channels
Closed Caption Mode

ANT 1
Off

Empty

Empty

Empty

Closed Caption Advanced

ANT 2
Cable Box

Input Labeling
Menu Language

English

Empty

Empty

Empty

Empty

Empty

Empty

Home CH Setup

Edit
Done

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

To add a channel to the selected Favorite Channel set:
Use the yz buttons to highlight an unchecked box next to a
channel you want to set as a favorite, and then press ENTER to
check the box.
To delete the channel from the selected Favorite Channels set:
Highlight a checked box and press
Edit Favorite Channels
ANT 1
ENTER to uncheck it.
2

3

Note: If you try to add more than
nine favorite channels per input, an
error message will appear. You will
need to delete (uncheck) a channel
before you can add another.

4
5
Only
9 favorite channels are allowed,
6
please
deselect other channels first.
7
8

OK

9

Reset

10

Cancel

11

Done

When done, highlight Done and press ENTER.
To program favorite channels for another input:
Either... Highlight ANT 1, ANT 2, or Cable Box, which
will change the favorite channel settings in the selected
input. (This will not change the TV’s current input.)
Or... Press INPUT to select ANT 1, ANT 2, or Cable Box
and then repeat steps 1–4.
“Cable Box” will appear only if you connected a cable box
to your TV.
Favorite Channels

To clear your favorite channel lists:
Edit Favorite Channels
1. Press MENU and open the
Preferences menu.
2. Highlight Favorite Channels
and press ENTER.
3. Highlight Edit and press
ENTER.
4. Highlight Reset and press
ENTER.
5. Highlight Done and press ENTER.

ANT 2

2

2-1
2-2

4-1
5

17 - 1
17 - 2
28 - 1

Reset

28 - 2

Cancel

28 - 3

Done

To tune your favorite channels for the current ANT input:
Press FAV CH yz.
To tune your favorite channels using the favorite channel
list:
1. Press 100 to display the favorite channel list.
1 CH 4-1
2 CH 4-2
2. Press the corresponding number button
3 CH 9
4 CH 10
(1-9) to select your desired channel.
Note: To tune your favorite channels for another
input, you will need to change the Input Selection
first.

5 CH 12
6 CH 17
7 CH 19
8 --9 ---

To quickly scan through your favorite channels in a nine
picture multi-window (for the current ANT input):
Press FAV SCAN. See page 83 for details.
Note:
• To tune to a channel from the FAV SCAN mode, highlight a
window and press ENTER.
• To scan your favorite channels for another input, you will need to
change the Input Selection first.

Channel Numbers
100
yz

ANT 2
ANT 1

CH 6

Empty

Empty

Empty

Empty

Empty

Empty

Empty

Empty

ANT 2
Cable Box

FAV CH yz

Edit
Done

FAV SCAN

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_049-057_4250HPX95

49
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:12 AM

49

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

Setting up and using TheaterNet™ on-screen device control
The TheaterNet feature allows you to control many brands of
IEEE1394 and/or infrared remote-controlled A/V devices
through your TV using on-screen control icons and the TV’s
remote control.
Note:
• Although the TheaterNet on-screen device control feature includes
codes for many devices, it may not include codes for some or all of
the features on certain devices you wish to control. If you are
unable to program the TheaterNet feature to operate your device
or some of the features on that device, use the device’s remote
control or the controls on the device.
• For IR pass-through device control information, see “Controlling
infrared remote-controlled devices through the TV (IR passthrough)” on page 24.

5. The TheaterNet Setup menu opens.
TheaterNet Setup
Input
Type
Brand
IR List
IR Code

Video 1
Cable
General Instrum...
0000
0 0 0 0
Test
Reset

Done

Using the x • buttons, select the Input the device is
connected to.
Note: When the input is changed, all unsaved settings will be
lost.

6. Press z and then x • to select the device Type.
7. Press z and then x • to select the device Brand.
Note: When selecting a new brand, the IR code will be set to 0.

Setting up TheaterNet
All device types except IEEE1394 require the following setup
process before you can control them using the TheaterNet onscreen icons.
All compatible IEEE1394 devices are automatically recognized
by the TheaterNet feature and do not require setup.
Note: See page 25 for details about the IEEE1394 ports. If your
IEEE1394 device is not recognized through the IEEE1394 port or
through the TheaterNet feature, it may be possible to set it up for IR
pass-through control as an infrared device (see page 24).

To set up TheaterNet device control:
1. Make sure you have properly connected your infrared
remote-controlled device(s). See page 24 for details.
2. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
3. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of
Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in
step 4).

8. Press z and then x • to select the device’s IR code.
9. If the desired IR code is found, skip to step 10.
If the desired IR code is not in the list, press z and use the
Channel Number buttons to enter the device IR code.
Note: You can find the IR code for your device in the onscreen list or in the TheaterNet device code table on pages
52–54.

10. Highlight Test and press ENTER to test whether the device
responds to the code. If the device does not respond to the
code, repeat steps 8 and 9 using another code for the same
device.
When done, highlight Done and press ENTER or choose a
different Input value for which to setup TheaterNet device
control.
To remove a device from TheaterNet:
1. Follow steps 1–5 above.
2. Highlight Reset and press ENTER.

Setup
Installation
Sleep Timer
On/Off Timer
PC Settings
Auto

HDMI 1 Audio
HDMI 2 Audio

Auto

Slide Show Interval

2 Sec

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

4. Open the Devices menu, highlight TheaterNet Devices,
and then press ENTER.

Devices
IEEE1394 Devices
TheaterNet Devices

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

50
#01E_049-057_4250HPX95

50
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Select device
type, brand,
and IR code
from owners
manual.

7/12/05, 9:13 AM

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

Setting up and using TheaterNet™ on-screen device control (continued)
Using the TheaterNet control icons
1. Set up your infrared devices in TheaterNet, if you have not
already done so (see page 50).

The following are examples of the TheaterNet on-screen
control icons for various devices.
Toshiba Symbio™ AVHD Recorder control*

Note: IEEE1394 devices do not need to be set up in
TheaterNet because they appear automatically in the
TheaterNet menu.

2. Press DEVICE on the remote control to display the device
control selection screen.

* If you connected a Toshiba
AVHD Recorder, you
must set up the TV Guide On Screen™ system in order to use
the Symbio’s full functionality. See Chapter 5 for details on
setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system. See pages 26
and 55 for further details about AVHD digital recorders.
TM

TheaterNet
0 Video 2

DEVICE
CTRL
x

y
z

1 Video 3

Toshiba

Toshiba

2 ColorStream HD1

3 ColorStream HD2

Toshiba

Toshiba

•
Toshiba

ENTER
EXIT

3. Using the yzx • buttons, highlight the device you want
to control and press ENTER.

Toshiba

CH

TheaterNet
0 Video 2

1 Video 3

Toshiba

Toshiba

2 ColorStream HD1
Toshiba

3 ColorStream HD2
Toshiba

4. The input automatically changes to the input for the
selected device, and the device’s control icons display
on-screen.
Toshiba

ColorStream HD1
ENTER

TOP MENU SELECT EXIT

Highlight the icon for the function you want to control and
press ENTER.
To select the device’s control icons directly:
Press CTRL.
To close the on-screen control icons:
Press EXIT.
To view another source:
Press DEVICE and select the input source you want to
view.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_049-057_4250HPX95

51
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:14 AM

51

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

TheaterNet™ IR device codes
Amplifiers
Brand
Aiwa
Bose
Carver
Curtis Mathes
Denon
GE
Harman/Kardon
JVC
Left Coast
Linn
Luxman
Magnavox
Marantz
NEC
Nakamichi
Optimus
Panasonic
Parasound
Philips
Pioneer
Polk Audio
RCA
Realistic
Sansui
Shure
Sony
Soundesign
Technics
Victor
Wards
Yamaha

Code
0406
0674
0269
0300
0160
0078
0892
0331
0892
0269
0165
0269
0892, 0321, 0269
0264
0321
0395, 0300
0308, 0521
0246
0892, 0269
0013, 0300
0892, 0269
0300
0395
0321
0264
0689, 0220
0078, 0211
0308, 0521
0331
0078, 0013, 0211
0354, 0133

Cable boxes
Brand
ABC
Americast
Bell & Howell
Bell South
Contec
Director
Everquest
Gemini
General Instrument
GoldStar
Hamlin
Hitachi
Hytex
Jasco
Jerrold

Memorex
Motorola
Oak
Pace
Panasonic
Paragon
Philips
Pioneer
Pulsar
Quasar

Code
0003, 0008, 0014,
0007, 0011, 0017
0899
0014
0899
0019
0476
0015
0015
0476, 0003, 0276,
0011, 0810
0144
0009, 0020, 0273
0011
0007
0015
0476, 0003, 0276,
0012, 0014, 0015,
0011, 0810
0000
0476, 1106, 0276,
0810
0019, 0007
0237
0000, 0107
0000
0305, 0317
0877, 0144, 0533,
1877
0000
0000

Cable boxes (cont.)

CD players (cont.)

Brand
RadioShack
Regal
Rembrandt
Runco
Samsung
Scientific Atlanta

Brand
Proton
QED
Quasar
RCA

Signal
Signature
sony
Starcom
Stargate
Starquest
Supercable
Tocom
Torx
Toshiba
Tusa
United Artists
Zenith

Code
0015
0020, 0273, 0279
0011
0000
0144
0877, 0008, 0017,
0477, 1877
0015
0011
1006
0003, 0015
0015
0015
0276
0012
0003
0000
0015
0007
0000, 0525, 0899

CD players
Brand
Aiwa
Burmester
California Audio Labs
Carver
Classic
DKK
DMX Electronics
Denon
Emerson
Fisher
GPX
Garrard
Genexxa
Harman/Kardon
Hitachi
JVC
KLH
Kenwood
Koss
Krell
LXI
Linn
MCS
MTC
Magnavox
Marantz
Miro
Mission
NSM
Nikko
Onkyo
Optimus

Panasonic
Parasound
Philips
Pioneer
Polk Audio

Code
0157, 0124
0420
0029, 0303
0157, 0179, 0437
1297
0000
0157
0873, 0003
0305
0174, 0179, 1325
1296
0393, 0420
0032, 0305
0157, 0173
0032
0072, 1294
1318, 1372, 1373
0681, 0826, 0626,
0028, 0037, 0190
1317
0157
0305
0157
0029
0420
0157, 0305
0626, 0029, 0157,
0180
0000
0157
0157
0174
0868, 0101
1063, 0000, 0032,
0037, 0145, 0179,
0305, 0420, 0437,
0468
0029, 0303
0420
0626, 0157
1063, 1062, 0032,
0305, 0468
0157

Realistic
Rotel
SAE
Sansui
Sanyo
Scott
Sears
Sharp
Sherwood
Sonic Frontiers
Sony
Soundesign
TDK
Tascam
Teac
Technics
Victor
Wards
Yamaha
Yorx

Laser disk players
Brand
Aiwa
Carver
Denon
Disco Vision
Funai
Harman/Kardon
Hitachi
Magnavox
Marantz
Mitsubishi
NAD
Optimus
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
Polk Audio
Quasar
Realistic
Samsung
Sega
Sony
Technics
Theta Digital
Yamaha

#01E_049-057_4250HPX95

52
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Code
0203
0064, 0194, 0323
0059, 0172
0023
0203
0194
0023
0194, 0217
0064, 0194
0059
0059
0059
0204
0064, 0194
0059, 0023
0194
0204
0203
0323
0023
0193, 0201
0204
0194
0217

Miscellaneous audio devices
Brand
Aiwa
Fisher
JVC
Jerrold
Scientific Atlanta
Sony
Starcom

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

52

Code
0157
0157
0029
1062, 0032, 0053,
0179, 0305, 0468,
0764
0179, 0180, 0420
0157, 0420
0157
0157, 0305
0179
0305
0305
0861, 0037, 0180
1067, 0180
0157
0490, 0000, 0100,
0185, 0604, 1364
0145
1208
0420
0174, 0180, 0393,
0420
0029, 0303
0072
0157, 0053
0888, 0036, 0187,
1292
0461

7/12/05, 9:14 AM

Code
0010, 0159, 0404
0052
0073
0520, 0459
0460
0010, 0159, 0576
0459

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

TheaterNet™ IR device codes (continued)
Video accessory (HDTV decoder)

Receivers (cont.)

Brand
Panasonic
Pioneer
Princeton
Samsung
Sensory Science
Sharp

Brand
Pioneer

Code
1120
1010
0113, 0295
1190
1126
1010

Receivers
Brand
ADC
Aiwa

Alco
Anam
Apex Digital
Arcam
Audiotronic
Audiovox
Bose
Cambridge Soundworks
Capetronic
Carver
Casio
Clarinette
Compaq
Curtis Mathes
Daewoo
Denon
Fisher
Garrard
Harman/Kardon
Hewlett Packard
JBL
JVC
KLH
Kenwood

Koss
LXI
Lasonic
Linn
Lloyd’s
MCS
Magnavox
Marantz
Modulaire
Musicmagic
Nakamichi
Onkyo
Optimus

Panasonic
Penney
Philips

Code
0531
1089, 1405, 0121,
0158, 0189, 0405,
1388, 1641
1390
1609
1257
1120
1189
1390
1229
1370
0531
1089, 1189, 0042,
0189
0195
0195
1136
0080
1250
1104, 1160, 0004,
1360
0042, 1801
0463
0110, 0189, 0891
1181
0110, 1306
0074, 1374
1390
1313, 1027, 1570,
1569, 0027, 0042,
0186
1366
0181
1798
0189
0195
0039
1089, 1189, 0189,
0195, 0391, 0531
1089, 1189, 0039,
0189
0195
1089
0097
0135, 0842, 1298
1023, 0042, 0080,
0181, 0186, 0531,
0670, 0738, 0801
1518, 0039, 0309,
0367
0195
1089, 1189, 1269,
0189, 0391, 1120

Polk Audio
Proscan
Quasar
RCA
Realistic
Samsung
Sansui
Sanyo
Sharp
Sherwood
Sony

Soundesign
Stereophonics
Sunfire
Teac
Technics
Thorens
Venturer
Victor
Wards
Yamaha
Yorx
Zenith

Satellite receivers (cont.)
Code
1023, 0014, 0080,
0150, 0244, 0531,
0630, 1384
0189
1254
0039
1023, 1254, 0080,
0531, 1390, 1609
0181, 0195
1295
1089, 0189
0801, 1251
0186, 1286
0491, 0502, 1653
1058, 1258, 1158,
0158, 0474, 1367,
1558, 1658,1758
0670
1023
1313
0463
1308, 1309, 1518,
0039, 0309
1189
1390
0074
0014, 0080, 0158,
0189
0176, 0186, 1176
0195
0857

Satellite receivers
Brand
AlphaStar
Chaparral
Crossdigital
DishPro
Echostar
Expressvu
GE
GOI
General Instrument
HTS
Hitachi
Hughes Network Systems
JVC
Magnavox
Memorex
Mitsubishi
Motorola
Next Level
Panasonic
Paysat
Philips
Proscan
RCA
RadioShack
SKY
Samsung
Sony
Star Choice

Brand
Toshiba

Uniden
Zenith

VCRs
Brand
Admiral
Adventura
Aiko
Aiwa
Akai
America Action
American High
Asha
Audiovox
Beaumark
Bell & Howell
Broksonic
CCE
Calix
Canon
Carver
Cineral
Citizen
Colt
Craig
Curtis Mathes

Code
0772
0216
1109
1005, 0775
1005, 0775
0775
0566
0775
0869
0775
0819
1142, 0749, 1749
0775
0724, 0722
0724
0749
0869
0869
0247, 0701
0724
1142, 0749, 0724,
1076, 0722, 1749
0392
0392, 0566, 0855,
0143
0869
0856
1109
0639
0869

Cybernex
Daewoo
Denon
Dynatech
Electrohome
Electrophonic
Emerex
Emerson

Fisher
Fuji
Funai
GE

Garrard
Go Video
GoldStar
Gradiente
HI-Q
Harley Davidson
Harman/Kardon
Harwood
Headquarter
Hitachi
Hughes Network Systems
JVC
Jensen
KEC

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_049-057_4250HPX95

53
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Code
0749, 0790, 1052,
1053, 1054, 1285,
1286, 1287, 1289,
1749
0724, 0722
0856, 1856

7/12/05, 9:14 AM

Code
0048, 0209
0000
0278
0037, 0000
0041
0278
0035
0240
0037, 0278
0240
0104
0184, 0121, 0209,
0002, 0479, 1479
0072, 0278
0037
0035
0081
0278
0037, 0278, 1278
0072
0037, 0047, 0240,
0072
0060, 0035, 0162,
0041, 0760, 1035
0240
0045, 0278, 1278
0042
0000
0037
0037
0032
0037, 0184, 0000,
0121, 0043, 0209,
0002, 0278, 0479,
1278, 1479
0047, 0104
0035, 0033
0000
0060, 0035, 0240,
0760, 0807, 1035,
1060
0000
0432
0037, 0038, 1237
0000
0047
0000
0081, 0038
0072
0046
0000, 0042, 0041
0042
0067, 0041
0041
0037, 0278

53

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

TheaterNet™ IR device codes (continued)
VCRs (cont.)
Brand
KLH
Keen
Kenwood
Kodak
LXI
Lloyd’s
Logik
MEI
MGA
MGN Technology
MTC
Magnasonic
Magnavox

Magnin
Marantz
Marta
Matsushita
Memorex

Minolta
Mitsubishi
Motorola
Multitech
NEC
Nikko
Noblex
Olympus
Optimus

Orion
Panasonic

Penney

Pentax
Philco
Philips
Pilot
Pioneer
Polk Audio
Profitronic
Proscan
Protec
Pulsar
Quarter
Quartz
Quasar
RCA

RadioShack
Radix

VCRs (cont.)
Code
0072
0693
0067, 0041, 0038
0035, 0037
0037
0000
0072
0035
0240, 0043
0240
0240, 0000
1278
0035, 0039, 0081,
0000, 0149, 0563,
1781
0240
0035, 0081
0037
0035, 0162, 0454
0035, 0162, 0037,
0048, 0039, 0047,
0240, 0000, 0104,
0209, 0046, 0454,
0479, 1037, 1162,
1237, 1262
0042
0067, 0043, 0807
0035, 0048
0000, 0072
0104, 0067, 0041,
0038
0037
0240
0035
1062, 0162, 0037,
0048, 0104, 0432,
0454, 1048, 1162,
1262
0184, 0209, 0002,
0479, 1479
1062, 0035, 0162,
0225, 0454, 0616,
1035, 1162, 1262
0035, 0037, 0240,
0042, 0038, 1035,
1237
0042
0035, 0209, 0479
0035, 0081, 0618,
1081, 1181
0037
0067
0081
0240
0060, 0760, 1060
0072
0039
0046
0046
0035, 0162, 0454,
1035, 1162
0060, 0240, 0042,
0149, 0760, 0807,
1035, 1060
0000, 1037
0037

Brand
Randex
Realistic

ReplayTV
Runco
STS
Samsung
Sanky
Sansui
Sanyo
Scott
Sears

Semp
Sharp
Shintom
Shogun
Singer
Sonic Blue
Sony

Sylvania
Symphonic
TMK
Tatung
Teac
Technics
Teknika
Thomas
Tivo
Toshiba
Totevision
Unitech
Vector
Vector Research
Video Concepts
Videomagic
Videosonic
Villain
Wards

White Westinghouse
XR-1000
Yamaha
Zenith

DVD players (cont.)
Code
0037
0035, 0037, 0048,
0047, 0000, 0104,
0046
0614, 0616
0039
0042
0240, 0045
0048, 0039
0000, 0067, 0209,
0041, 0479, 1479
0047, 0240, 0104,
0046
0184, 0045, 0121,
0043
0035, 0037, 0047,
0000, 0042, 0104,
0046, 1237
0045
0048, 0807, 0848
0072
0240
0072
0614, 0616
0035, 0032, 0000,
0033, 0636, 1032,
1232
0035, 0081, 0000,
0043, 1781
0000
0240
0041
0000, 0041
0035, 0162
0035, 0037, 0000
0000
0618, 0636
0045, 0043, 0845
0037, 0240
0240
0045
0038
0045
0037
0240
0000
0060, 0035, 0048,
0047, 0081, 0240,
0000, 0042, 0072,
0149, 0760
0209, 0072, 1278
0035, 0000, 0072
0038
0039, 0000, 0209,
0033, 0479, 1479

DVD players
Brand
Aiwa
Apex Digital

Audiologic
B&K
Blue Parade

Code
0641
0672, 0717, 0755,
0794, 0796, 0797,
0830, 0856, 1100
0736
0655, 0662
0571

Brand
Broksonic
DVD2000
Daewoo
Denon
Emerson
Enterprise
Fisher
GE
GPX
Go Video
Gradiente
Greenhill
Harman/Kardon
Hitachi
Hiteker
JBL
JVC
KLH
Kenwood
Konka
Koss
Lasonic
Magnavox
Malata
Marantz
Microsoft
Mintek
Mitsubishi
Nesa
Next Base
Norcent
Onkyo
Oritron
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
Polk Audio
Princeton
Proscan
RCA
Rotel
Rowa
Sampo
Samsung
Sansui
Sanyo
Sharp
Sherwood
Shinsonic
Sony
Sylvania
Technics
Techwood
Theta Digital
Toshiba
Tredex
Urban Concepts
XBox

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

54
#01E_049-057_4250HPX95

54
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:14 AM

Code
0695
0521
0784
0490, 0634
0591
0591
0670
0522, 0717
0699, 0769
0715
0651
0717
0582, 0702
0573, 0664
0672
0702
0558, 0623, 0867
0717
0490, 0534, 0682,
0737
0711, 0719, 0720,
0721
0651
0798
0503, 0675
0782
0539
0522
0717
0521
0717
0826
0872
0503, 0627
0651
0490, 0632, 1362,
1462, 1490
0503, 0539, 0646,
0854
0525, 0571, 0632
0539
0674
0522
0522, 0571, 0717,
0822
0623
0823
0698
0573, 0820
0695
0670
0630
0633
0533
0533, 0864, 1533
0675, 0821
0490
0692
0571
0503, 0695, 1045
0800
0503
0522

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

Setting the AVHD device skip time
When you connect an external AVHD (audio/video hard drive)
device—such as the Toshiba Symbio™ AVHD Recorder—to
one of the TV’s IEEE1394 ports, you can use the AVHD device
skip time feature to set the number of minutes the device will
skip forward or backward when you press the SKIP buttons.
Note:
TM

• This TV will work best with the Toshiba
AVHD
Recorder for recording high definition and standard definition
material from either tuner and for controlling live TV (pause/rewind/
etc.). When the Symbio™ AVHD Recorder is connected to the TV,
the remote control keys (Live, STOP, REW, PAUSE, PLAY, etc.) are
automatically activated to allow pausing of live TV.
• When you connect an AVHD (or D-VHS) device, the TV Guide
On Screen™ system is automatically configured to allow recording.
See page 26 for device connection information. See Chapters 5 and
7 for details about setting up and using the TV Guide On screen™
system.

To set the AVHD device skip time:
1. Press MENU and open
the Setup menu.
Setup
Sleep Timer
2. Highlight AVHD Skip
On/Off Timer
Time and press •.
PC Settings
HDMI 1 Audio
3. Press y or z to select
HDMI 2 Audio
Slide Show Interval
the AVHD skip time (1,
AVHD Skip Time
3, 5, or 15 minutes) and
press ENTER.
Navigate

1 min
3 min

Setting the time and date
Note: If you already set up the TV Guide On Screen™ system, the
time and date were set automatically and you can skip this step.

To set the time and date:
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of
Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in
step 3 below.)
3. Open the Time And Date menu, highlight Start Setup, and
press ENTER.

Time And Date
Start Setup

If you have not set up the TV Guide On Screen™ system,
or if you have not set up the time, the following screen will
appear. To set the time, highlight TV Guide On Screen™
and press ENTER. The TV Guide On Screen™ setup
sequence will start, and the time and date will be set
automatically.

5 min

Auto

15 min

Auto

Your TV Guide On Screen system can provide accurate
time and date information.

2 Sec
15 min
Select

CH RTN Back

Time And Date

EXIT Exit

It is recommended you set up TV Guide On Screen
first and use it to obtain the time and date.
TV Guide On Screen

Manual

Setting the HDMI™ audio mode
To select the HDMI audio mode:
1. Press MENU and open
the Setup menu.
Setup
Installation
2. Highlight HDMI 1 (or
Auto
Sleep Timer
Digital
2) Audio and press •.
On/Off Timer
Analog
PC Settings
Auto
3. Press z or y to select
Auto
HDMI 1 Audio
HDMI 2 Audio
Auto
the HDMI audio mode
Slide Show Interval
2 Sec
(Auto, Digital, or
Analog) and press
ENTER. (Auto is the
recommended mode). See “Connecting an HDMI or a
DVI device to the HDMI input” on page 22.
Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

Cancel

If you have already set up the TV Guide On Screen™
system, the time and date setting screen will appear and you
will need to manually set the time and date.
Time And Date
Date (MM/DD/YY)

0 6/3 0/0 5

Time (HH:MM)

1 1 : 1 1 AM

Cancel

Done

EXIT Exit

Note:
• If you highlight TV Guide On Screen™ (above) to set the time and
date through the TV Guide On Screen™ system and a power
outage occurs, the time and date will be updated automatically
when the power is restored.
• If you highlight Manual (above) to set the time and date manually
and a power outage occurs, you will lose the time and date settings
when the power is restored.
• If you manually set the time and date and then perform TV Guide
On Screen™ setup, the manual time and date settings will be
overridden by the TV Guide On Screen™ settings.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_049-057_4250HPX95

55
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:15 AM

55

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

Viewing the CableCARD™ menu

Viewing the digital signal meter

A CableCARD™ enables you to view encrypted digital channels.
See page 15 for connection and subscription information.
After the CableCARD™ is inserted, a CableCARD™ option
appears in the Applications menu, with informational screens
provided by your digital CableCARD™ service (see illustrations
below).

You can view the digital signal meter for ANT 1 and ANT 2
digital TV input sources only.

CableCard Connected -- Acquiring
channel information.

To view the digital signal meter:
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of
Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in
step 3 below.)

CableCard services will only operate
with cable signal connected to Antenna 1.
Setup
Installation

™

To view the CableCARD menu:
1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu.
2. Highlight CableCARD™ and press •.
3. Press z or y to select one of the side menu items and press
ENTER to display the information.

Sleep Timer
On/Off Timer
PC Settings
HDMI Audio

Auto

Slide Show Interval

2 Sec

AVHD Skip Time

15 min

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

3. Open the Terrestrial menu, highlight Signal Meter, and
press ENTER.

Applications
TV Guide On Screen

IP Service

Audio Player

Conditional Access

Terrestrial

Picture Viewer

CableCARD(tm) Status

Digital CC/Audio Selector

Network Setup

Input Configuration

CableCARD

CableCARD(tm) Pairing

Channel program
Channel Add/Delete
Signal Meter

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

Note: The CableCARD™ menu is for informational purposes
only and has no user-adjustable options.

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

4. Use the yzx • buttons to select the antenna input and
digital channel whose signal you want to check.
Note: The physical digital channel number listed in the Signal
Meter screen may not correspond to a virtual TV channel
number. Contact your local broadcasters to obtain the RF
channel numbers for your local digital stations.
Signal Meter
Signal Locked

0
Antenna

Peak

0

1

Physical Digital Channel

13

Virtual Digital Channel

N/A
Done

To close the screen and return to the Terrestrial menu:
Highlight Done and press ENTER.
To return to normal viewing:
Press EXIT.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

56
#01E_049-057_4250HPX95

56
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:16 AM

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

Viewing the system status
To check the system status:
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of
Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown
below right).
Setup

System Status

Installation

System Infomation

Sleep Timer
On/Off Timer
PC Settings
Auto

HDMI 1 Audio
HDMI 2 Audio

Auto

Slide Show Interval

2 Sec

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

3. Open the System Status menu, highlight System
Information, and then press ENTER.
4. Use the x • buttons to scroll through the menu bar to
check the Product Information and Software Version.
System Information

System Information

Product Information
Brand:
Model:
IEEE1394 GUID:

Software Version

Toshiba
42HPX95
00003914-28343803

0.8.2
Jun 13 2005 - 13:54:14
FW:1.41
Sub:41

Done

Done

To close the screen and return to the Installation menu:
Highlight Done and press ENTER.
To return to normal viewing:
Press EXIT.

Restore Factory Defaults
To restore all settings and channels to their factory default
values:
1. Follow steps 1–3 above.
2. Use the x • buttons to scroll through the menu bar to
select Factory Defaults.
3. Enter your PIN code (or 0000 if no PIN code has been set).
4. Highlight Yes and press ENTER. The TV will turn off
automatically after a few seconds. After the TV turns off,
unplug the TV power cord and then plug it in again to
complete the restore process.
System Information
Press YES to confirm. After the TV
turns off, unplug it and plug it dack
in to complete the reset.

Yes

No

To cancel the reset:
Highlight No and press ENTER.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_049-057_4250HPX95

57
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:17 AM

57

7

Using the TV Guide On Screen™
interactive program guide

The TV Guide On Screen™ system is a free, interactive,
on-screen program guide built in to your Toshiba TV that lists
schedules and information for TV programs in your area.
Note: Over-the-air or cable access to stations carrying TV Guide
On Screen™ data is required for the TV Guide On Screen™ system to
operate. The TV Guide On Screen™ system does not work with satellite
programming. Toshiba does not provide the TV Guide On Screen™ data;
rather, such data is provided by a third party, which is responsible for its
accuracy and availability. Additionally, occasional compatibility issues may
exist between the TV Guide On Screen™ system contained in your TV and
the data provided by the third party. If you experience any performance
issues with your TV Guide On Screen™ system, please contact the
following:
• In the U.S., call TACP Consumer Solutions at (800) 631-3811 or
visit http://www.tacp.com/customersupport/contact.asp.

• Direct tuning—Directly tune the TV to a current program
you want to watch by selecting it in the program guide.
• Reminders—Schedule show reminders that will either display
an on-screen notification banner or automatically tune the TV
to the channel of the show for which you set the reminder.
• Recording—Easily schedule recording of one or more
programs.
Note: A VCR or IEEE1394 recording device is required for recording.
It is recommended that you connect your devices according to the
instructions in Chapter 2.

• Search—Search for shows by category, keyword, or
alphabetically.
• On-screen help—The TV Guide On Screen™ system contains
on-screen feature definitions and navigation instructions.

• In Canada, call TCL Customer Service at 1-800-268-3404.

The TV Guide On Screen™ system includes the following
features:
• Streamlined on-screen assisted setup—Quickly and easily set
up your TV Guide On Screen™ system using the on-screen
prompts (see “Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system”
below).
• Program listings and INFO windows—Scroll through eight
days of TV listings and view program information such as
rating, stereo, HDTV, new episode.
• Watch TV and display TV Guide On Screen™ information
simultaneously.
• Channel lineup customization—Customize your channel
lineup so your favorite stations are listed first.

To open the TV Guide On Screen™ system:
• While watching TV, press
TV GUIDE on the
Applications
remote control;
TV Guide On Screen
Audio Player
—or—
Picture Viewer
Digital CC/Audio Selector
• Press MENU, open the
CableCARD
Applications menu,
highlight TV Guide
On Screen™, and press
ENTER.
Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

Note: After setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system, the program
guide opens automatically by default when you turn on the TV. To turn
off this feature, see page 45.

Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system
Follow these instructions to set up the TV Guide On Screen™
system so it can receive current program data for your area.
Note: If you move the TV to a different ZIP/postal code, you will
need to perform the TV Guide On Screen™ Setup process to
reconfigure your TV Guide On Screen™ system.

If you have not already connected your antenna, cable box,
and/or recording device, see Chapter 2 for connection
instructions.
Note: You must connect a VCR or an IEEE1394 compatible
recording device to use the TV Guide On Screen™ system’s
one-touch recording feature. It is recommended that you
connect your devices according to the connection instructions
in Chapter 2.

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
2. Highlight Installation and then press ENTER to open the
Installation menus. (A new set of menu icons will appear
on-screen, as shown in step 3 below.)
3. Open the TV Guide On Screen™ Setup menu, highlight
Start, and then press ENTER.
Setup

TV Guide On Screen Setup

Installation

Start

Sleep Timer
On/Off Timer
PC Settings
HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

HDMI 2 Audio

Auto

Slide Show Interval

2 Sec
Navigate

Navigate

The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of
television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is
prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and
other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability.

Select

CH RTN Back

#01E_058-061_4250HPX95

58
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

4. Go to Chapter 5 for instructions on completing the setup.
Read this chapter for details on using the TV Guide
On Screen™ interactive program guide.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

58

Select

EXIT Exit

7/12/05, 9:18 AM

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

Navigating the TV Guide On Screen™ system
• While watching TV,
press TV GUIDE to
enter the TV Guide
On Screen™ system.
The LISTINGS screen
will appear with the current
show highlighted.
• When in the TV Guide
On Screen™ system, if you
press TV GUIDE from any
screen, the TV will tune to the
show displayed in the Video
Window.
• Use the arrow keys on the
remote control (yzx •) to
highlight any show, and then
press ENTER to tune to that
show.
• Scroll left or right (x
•) to view eight days of listings.
• Press MENU to display a panel menu with options for the currently
highlighted program or tile, including setting recordings and reminders.
• To access another Service screen:
1. Press y to highlight the Service Bar.
2. Press x or • to highlight a different Service (LISTINGS, SEARCH,
SETUP, SCHEDULE, or RECORDINGS).
3. Press z to use that Service.
Note: Helpful information about each Service appears in the Info Box.

Note:
• The TV Guide On Screen™ menus shown in this manual are
for illustration purposes only. The channels, programs, and
TV Guide On Screen™ information as illustrated may not be
available in your area. The options and features as illustrated
are subject to change when updates are downloaded from the
TV Guide On Screen™ service to your TV.
• The TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide supports
cable-ready, cable box, and digital cable services, as well as
over-the-air broadcasts. It does not provide listings for satellite
services.

TV Guide On Screen™ remote control functions
FUNCTION

Numbers

TV GUIDE

• When watching TV, enters the TV Guide On Screen™ system and highlights the current show
listing.
• When in the TV Guide On Screen™ system, returns to watching TV and displays the show in
the Video Window.

Numbers

• For direct channel tuning, priority ordering, and channel editing.

– (digital separator)

• For entering digital channel numbers.

MENU

• Displays the panel menu, in which you can choose options (for example, record, remind,
keyword).

INFO

• Cycles between levels of information, as available, in a Service screen or other type of screen.

ENTER

• Makes a selection or executes an action.
• With a currently airing show listing highlighted, returns to watching TV and tunes to the show
channel.
• With a future airing show listing highlighted, displays a panel menu with viewing options.

y zx •

• Provide directional control.
• When watching TV, y and z provide surfing through channels turned ON in the LISTINGS
screen.

PAGE UP/DOWN

• When in the TV Guide On Screen™ system, moves from one set of screen information to the
next, when applicable.

REC

• When in the TV Guide On Screen™ system or watching TV, initiates the recording process.

SPLIT

• When in the TV Guide On Screen™ system, toggles between locking and unlocking the Video
Window.

SS| and |TT

• Jump forward and backward one day in the LISTINGS screen.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_058-061_4250HPX95

59
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:18 AM

}

BUTTON

– (digital
separator)
MENU
INFO
TV GUIDE
ENTER
x

y
z

•

PAGE UP/
DOWN

|TT and SS|

REC
SPLIT

59

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

Navigating the TV Guide On Screen™ system (continued)
Video Window
• When you open the
TV Guide
On Screen™ system,
the current program
appears in the Video
Window.
• As you scroll through
the listings, the Video
Window will change
to display the selected
program.
• The lock/unlock icon indicates the status of the Video Window.
• You can set the Video Window to remain on a single channel (locked) or to
change channels (unlocked) as you navigate through listings.

Info Box

To lock/unlock the Video Window:
Press the SPLIT button on the remote control to toggle between locking
and unlocking the Video Window.
—or—
Highlight a channel logo or the LISTINGS Service Bar Label and press
MENU to display the option to lock/unlock the Video Window.

Panel Menus
• A panel menu appears:
– when you press MENU on a highlighted tile (if additional options
are available); or
– when you press ENTER on a show starting in the future.
• When a panel menu appears, the highlighted tile changes color to
indicate that the panel menu relates to the tile.
• Press INFO to display help for the current panel menu.
• Press y and z to move among the options.
• Press x and • to move to adjacent options or, if the highlight is on a
odometer, to change the odometer choice.
• To move the highlight to the default command button, press ENTER
from an odometer or entry box.
• To execute the action and close the panel menu, highlight the
command button and press ENTER.
• To cancel any changes and close the panel menu:
– press MENU; or
– highlight Cancel and press ENTER.
• If a panel menu contains more options than can be displayed in one
panel, the word “more” appears at the bottom of the menu. To access
the additional options, either scroll down using the z button or the
PAGE UP/DOWN (CH yz) button.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

60
#01E_058-061_4250HPX95

60
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:19 AM

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

Navigating the TV Guide On Screen™ system (continued)
Info Box
• An Info Box contains information about a show, Service, or Panel Ad, or
provides general help (for example, for a panel menu).
• An Info Box for a program in the LISTINGS screen can have up to three
sizes: Small, Large, or “No.”
– Press INFO on the remote control to cycle among the sizes.
– The default Info Box size is Small. To change the default size, open the
SETUP Service screen (see page 70).
) appears on the Info Action Bar if the Info
• The Info Button icon (
Box size can change and/or if there are additional Info screens. Press INFO
on the remote control to change the size and/or to display additional Info
screens.
• In some instances, the INFO button on the remote control is used to page
forward (for example, if there are additional pages of information in a Panel
Ad, a Channel Ad, or help text).

Info Action Bar

Small Info Box

Large Info Box

TV Guide On Screen™ Icons
ICON

NAME

DESCRIPTION

Info Button

• Additional Info Box information is available, or the Info Box has additional sizes.

Progress Bar

• Elapsed time in current show.
• Progress bar appears in LISTINGS and SEARCH and when the Info Button is pressed while watching TV.

HDTV

• Show is presented in high-definition TV, if available.

New

• Show is new (not a repeat).

Stereo

• Show is available in stereo.

Dolby Digital

• Show is available with Dolby Digital 5.1 audio (digital channels only).

CC

• Closed captioning is available for the show.

TV Rating

• TV rating for the show.

Record Once

• Show is set to Record Once.
• Other frequencies are Daily (manual recording only),
Regularly, and Weekly.

Record Off

• Show is set to Record but is currently Off (show remains in Schedule).

Record
Suspended

• Recording is Suspended due to a schedule conflict (show remains in Schedule).
• Recording resumes when the conflict no longer exists.

Remind Once • Show is set to Remind Once.
• Other frequencies are Daily (manual reminding only),
Regularly, and Weekly.
Remind Off

• Show is set to Remind but is currently Off (show remains in Schedule).

Remind
Suspended

• Reminder is Suspended due to a schedule conflict (show remains in Schedule).
• Remind resumes when the conflict no longer exists.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_058-061_4250HPX95

61
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:20 AM

61

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

TV Guide On Screen™ Services
The TV Guide On Screen™ system consists of five main services: LISTINGS, SEARCH, RECORDINGS, SCHEDULE, and SETUP.
Note:
• For the RECORDINGS service to display, an IEEE1394 recording device must be connected to the television (see Chapter 2); otherwise, only
four services display. Recording to other devices, such as a VCR, are possible from within the LISTINGS service.
• When using the TV Guide On Screen™ system to record a program for the first time, it is recommended that you perform a test recording to
make sure your system is set up properly.
• If the power is cut or the plug becomes disconnected during timer recording, any recorded contents will be lost.
• If the TV power cord is unplugged for an extended period of time, it may take up to 24 hours with the TV in standby mode (power cord
plugged in and power OFF) to download the entire TV Guide On Screen™ program schedule. It may take up to a week before an entire
program schedule is available. Be sure to follow the instructions under “TV Guide On Screen™ Reminder” on page 45.

LISTINGS screen
• When you open the TV Guide On Screen™ system,
LISTINGS is always the first service displayed.

• Use the Number buttons on the remote control to jump to a
specific channel’s listings.
• To watch a show (if on now), highlight the show and press
ENTER.
• To display the Episode Options panel menu for a particular
show, highlight a show and press MENU.

• With LISTINGS highlighted in the Service Bar, press INFO
to display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the screen.

Episode Options panel menu
From the Episode Options panel menu, you can choose to set a
recording, set a reminder, or tune to the channel. The following
are descriptions of the buttons.
• Use the arrow keys to move the highlight within LISTINGS
to do the following:
– View eight days of show listings
– Read show descriptions

GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no
information, and returns to the Service Bar.
TUNE TO CHANNEL / WATCH NOW: Exits the TV Guide
On Screen™ system and tunes to the channel of the highlighted
show (if the show airs in the future) or tunes to the show (if the
show is currently airing). The button label changes according to
whether the show is currently airing or not.
SET RECORDING: Displays the Record Options panel menu,
from which you can set the show to record. For additional
information, see “SCHEDULE screen” and “Record features”
on page 66.

– Tune directly to a show currently airing
– Set a show to Remind (e.g., start time, frequency, automatic
power ON, auto-tune TV)
– Set a show to Record (e.g, start/end time, frequency)
– Lock and unlock the Video Window
– Access panel ads and channel ads

SET REMINDER: Displays the Remind Options panel menu,
from which you can set a reminder for the show. For additional
information, see “SCHEDULE screen” on page 66 and
“Remind features” on page 68.
CANCEL: Closes the menu, changes no information, and
returns to the highlighted show.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

62
#01E_062-067_4250HPX95

62
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:20 AM

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

TV Guide On Screen™ Services (continued)
SEARCH screen
• SEARCH allows you to find shows by keyword,
alphabetically, or by category (HDTV, Movies, Sports,
Children, Educational, News, Variety, Series).

• With SEARCH highlighted in the Service Bar, press INFO to
display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the screen.

• Use the arrow keys to move the highlight within SEARCH.

Example: Category search
1. From the SEARCH screen, press z to highlight a category
(in this example, MOVIES).

2. Press z to highlight a subcategory (in this example, ALL).

3. Press ENTER to display a list of all movies, organized by
date and time.

4. Highlight a show and press ENTER to watch (if on now)
or press MENU to display the Episode Options panel
menu. (See “Episode Options panel menu” on page 62.)

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_062-067_4250HPX95

63
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:20 AM

63

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

TV Guide On Screen™ Services (continued)
SEARCH screen (continued)
Example: Keyword search
Keyword search lets you enter a word(s) to find a particular
show by category or for every show title that matches.
1. From the SEARCH screen, highlight KEYWORD, and
then press ENTER.
2. Highlight NEW SEARCH in the panel menu, and then
press ENTER.

6. A list of all matching shows for that keyword is displayed.

7. Highlight a show and press ENTER to display all airings.
Then highlight a specific listing and press ENTER to watch
(if on now) or press MENU to display the Episode Options
panel menu. From the Episode Options menu, you can
choose to set a recording or reminder, or tune to the
channel (see “Episode Options panel menu” on page 62.)
3. The Search Options panel menu opens. Highlight
CATEGORY, and then use the arrow keys to highlight a
category to search (All, HDTV, Children, Sports, etc.).
4. After highlighting a category, press z to highlight ENTER
KEYWORD, and then press ENTER.

5. The keyboard is displayed. Use the arrow keys to highlight
a character and then press ENTER to display it. When
finished entering all characters, highlight DONE and press
ENTER.

The TV Guide On Screen™ system stores all the keywords you
create.
To edit or delete a keyword:
From the SEARCH/KEYWORD screen, highlight the
keyword you want to edit or delete, and then press MENU
to display the Search Options panel menu, with the
following options:
– GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no
information, and returns to the Service Bar.
– EDIT SEARCH: Displays the keyboard, from which you
can change the keyword.

– DELETE SEARCH: Displays the Confirmation panel
menu. Select YES to delete the search or NO to close the
panel menu.
– CANCEL: Closes the panel menu, changes no
information, and returns to the highlighted keyword.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

64
#01E_062-067_4250HPX95

64
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:21 AM

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

TV Guide On Screen™ Services (continued)
RECORDINGS screen
The RECORDINGS service screen displays a list of previously
recorded or currently recording shows on an IEEE1394
recording device connected to the TV (see Chapter 2).
Note: RECORDINGS will not appear in the Service Bar unless you
have an IEEE1394 video recording device connected to one of the
IEEE1394 ports on the TV. See Chapter 2 for details.
For additional details, see “Record features” on page 66.

• With RECORDINGS highlighted in the Service Bar, press
INFO to display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the
screen.

To choose the way recordings are displayed:
1. Highlight RECORDINGS on the Service Bar, and press
MENU to display the Recording Options panel menu.
2. Press yz to choose between View As and Sort By, as
described below.
View As: Press x • to choose between the following:
• List—Displays every recorded episode for a show (see
example in Screen B, at right).
Note: In List view, highlight an episode to display an Info
Box with show information. Press MENU to display the
Episode Options panel menu (see “Episode Options
panel menu” on page 62).

To view a recording, you can do one of the following:
• Highlight an episode and press ENTER to view it now. The
episode either starts from the beginning or from where it
was last stopped (if viewed previously).
• Highlight an episode and press MENU to display the
Episode Options panel menu, with the following options:
– GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no
information, and returns to the Service Bar.
– RESUME: Starts from the beginning or from where it
was last stopped (if viewed previously).
– PLAY FROM BEGINNING: Starts from the beginning,
even if stopped previously.
– DELETE EPISODE: Deletes the episode from the
RECORDINGS list and deletes the recording from the
IEEE1394 recording device. A Confirm panel menu
displays. Press YES to delete the episode or NO to close
the panel menu.
– CANCEL: Closes the panel menu, changes no
information, and returns to the highlighted show.

Screen A

• Group—Displays recorded shows without listing every
recorded episode (see example in Screen A, at right).
Note: In Group view, highlight a show and press ENTER
to view all recorded episodes. Press ENTER again to
collapse the episode list.

Screen B

Sort By: Press x and • to choose between the following:
• Title—Displays recorded shows in alphabetical order (see
example in Screen A, at right).
• Date—Displays recorded shows by date and time, with
most recent first (see example in Screen B, at right).
3. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and
then press ENTER again to close the panel menu and
display the recordings with the selected options.

The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject
you to civil and criminal liability.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_062-067_4250HPX95

65
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:21 AM

65

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

TV Guide On Screen™ Services (continued)
SCHEDULE screen

Record features

The SCHEDULE service screen allows you to review, edit, or
delete Record and Remind events you set previously.

You can set a show to Record, or edit the record settings for a
show, in LISTINGS, SEARCH, and SCHEDULE. There are
three ways to set a show to Record, as described below.
1) Set a show to Record using the REC key on the
remote control

Press REC on the remote control to record the show Once
with current default settings (start and end recording on
time). Each time you press REC, you change the Record
frequency (but not the default settings) among Once
(default), Regularly, Weekly, and Cancel.
• With SCHEDULE highlighted in the Service Bar, press
INFO to display a help screen. Press INFO again to close
the screen.

Note: The related Record icon appears on the show tile
each time you press REC. See “Record icons,” on page 67.

2) Set a show to Record from a panel menu

1. Highlight a show and press MENU to display the
Episode Options panel menu.
2. Highlight SET RECORDING and press ENTER to
display the Record Options panel menu.

• Highlight an event and press MENU to display the Schedule
Options panel menu, with the following options:
– GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no
information, and returns to the Service Bar.
– WATCH NOW: Exits the TV Guide On Screen™ system
and tunes to the highlighted show.
– DELETE RECORDING: Removes the recording from
the schedule. A Confirm panel menu displays. Press YES
to delete the recording or NO to close the panel menu.
– EDIT RECORDING: Opens a menu in which you can
change existing recording information.
– SET REMINDER: Opens a menu in which you can set a
reminder for the show (Record is not cancelled).
– CANCEL: Closes the panel menu, changes no
information, and returns to the highlighted show.
An icon identifies the event type. For more details, see “Record
features,”at right, and “Remind features” on page 68.

3. Highlight the FREQUENCY field, and press x or • to
choose among Once, Regularly, Weekly, or Off.
4. Highlight the START field, and press x or • to choose
in the range from 120 minutes early to 120 minutes late
or On Time (default = On Time).
5. Repeat step 4 for the END field.
6. Highlight the RECORDER field and press x or • to
choose the recording device.
Note: For connected IEEE1394 recording devices only.

7. Highlight the KEEP UNTIL field and press x or • to
choose how long you want to keep the Record event.
Note: For connected IEEE1394 recording devices only.

8. Press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE RECORDING,
and press ENTER again to close the menu.
A Record icon for the selected frequency appears on the
show tile. See “Record icons” on page 67.
Note: For connected IEEE1394 recording devices only.

Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the
menu, change no information, and return to the
highlighted show.
Note: You can change the default values of the Record Options
panel menu fields. See “Change default options” on page 71.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

66
#01E_062-067_4250HPX95

66
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:22 AM

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

TV Guide On Screen™ Services (continued)
Record features (continued)
3) Manually set a show to Record

1. Highlight SCHEDULE in the Service Bar, and press
MENU to display the Schedule Options panel menu.
2. Highlight NEW MANUAL RECORDING and press
ENTER to display the Record Options panel menu.
Press yzx • to move through the options.
Press the Number buttons or yzx • to change the
information, as necessary.
3. Enter the information in the panel menu fields. You will
need to set the start and end time for the recording. For
details, see “Set a show to Record from a panel menu” on
the previous page.

Record conflict
A conflict message appears for the following reasons:
• A show set to Record overlaps with any part of another
show previously set to Record.
• A show set to Record overlaps with a show previously set to
auto-tune. (For auto-tune details, see “Remind features” on
page 68.)
Select one of these options:
• Record Anyway—This show will override an existing show
set to Record or auto-tune.
• Don’t Record This Show—Cancels the Recording.

Note: When setting a Manual Recording, the frequency
option “Daily” is available instead of “Regularly.” See “Record
icons,” below right, for a description of Record icons.

4. When finished entering the information in the fields,
press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE RECORDING,
and press ENTER again to close the menu.
A Record icon for the selected frequency appears on the
show tile. See “Record icons,” below right.
Note: Manual recording is listed by channel number.

Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the
menu, change no information, and return to the
highlighted show.
When using the TV Guide On Screen™ system to record a program for the
first time, it is recommended that you perform a test recording to make
sure your system is set up properly.

Recording notification banner
• If the TV is not on, the recording occurs as scheduled.
• If the TV is on and you are watching the channel that is set to
record, the recording occurs as scheduled.
• If the TV is on and you are watching a channel other than
the one that is set to record, a notification banner (illustrated
below) appears on-screen before recording starts. At that time
you can choose to start or cancel recording.
The default highlighted item in the notification banner is
“Change channel; start recording.” If no change is made
within 3 minutes, the notification banner will close
automatically, the channel will change to the one set to
record, and the recording will occur as scheduled. If you want
to cancel the recording, select “Don’t change; cancel
recording” in the notification banner and press ENTER.

Record icons
Following is a description of the Record icons that will appear
on the tile for a show set to Record.
• Record Once

—Records the show one time.

—Records the show every time the
• Record Regularly
show airs on the same channel and starts at the same time.
• Record Weekly
—Records the show every time the show
airs on the same day of the week and on the same channel,
and starts at the same time.
• Record Daily
—Records on the same channel and at the
same start time every weekday (Monday through Friday).
Note: This icon displays for manual recordings only.

• Record Suspend
—Recording is Suspended due to a
schedule conflict (show remains in Schedule).
• Record Off
—Keeps the Recording in the Schedule list
but will not record this show until the frequency is changed.
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject
you to civil and criminal liability.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_062-067_4250HPX95

67
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:23 AM

67

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

TV Guide On Screen™ Services (continued)
Remind features
You can set a Reminder to perform the following functions:
• Automatically turn on the TV (if off ) at the scheduled
reminder time, and tune the TV to the channel of the show
for which you set the reminder.
• Automatically tune the TV, at the scheduled reminder time,
to the channel of the show for which you set the reminder.
• Display an on-screen notification banner (reminding you that
the show is about to start), from which you can choose to
tune the TV to the show’s channel or cancel the reminder.
You can set a show reminder, or edit the reminder settings for a
show, in LISTINGS, SEARCH, and SCHEDULE. There are
two ways to set a show reminder, as described below.

Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the
menu, change no information, and return to the
highlighted show.
2) Manually set a show Reminder

1. Highlight SCHEDULE in the Service Bar, and press
MENU to display the Schedule Options panel menu.
2. Highlight NEW MANUAL REMINDER and press
ENTER to display the Remind Options panel menu.
Press yzx • to move through the options.
Press the Number buttons or yzx • to change the
information, as necessary.

1) Set a show Reminder from a panel menu

1. Highlight a show and press MENU to display the
Episode Options panel menu.
2. Highlight SET REMINDER and press ENTER to
display the Remind Options panel menu.

3. Enter the information in the panel menu fields. You will
need to set the start and end time for the reminder. For
details, see “Set a show reminder from a panel menu,”
at left.

3. Highlight the FREQUENCY field, and press x or • to
choose among Once, Regularly, Weekly or Off.
4. Highlight the POWER ON TV field, and press x or •
to choose either Yes (to turn on the TV automatically, if
off, at the scheduled Reminder time) or No (default).
5. Highlight the AUTO TUNE TV field, and press x or •
to choose either Yes (to automatically tune the TV to the
channel you are setting the Reminder for at the
scheduled Reminder time; the TV must be on at the
time) or No (default).
Note: You can change the default values of the Remind
Options panel menu fields. See “Change default options” on
page 71 for details.

Note: When setting a Manual Reminder, the frequency
option “Daily” is available instead of “Regularly.” See “Remind
icons,” on the following page, for a description of Reminder
icons.

4. When finished entering the information in the fields,
press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE REMINDER,
and press ENTER again to close the menu.
A Remind icon for the selected frequency appears on the
show tile. See “Remind icons” on the following page.
Note: Manual reminders are listed by channel number.

Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the
menu, change no information, and return to the
highlighted show.

6. Highlight the WHEN field (to set a time for displaying
the reminder screen), and press x or • to choose in the
range from 15 minutes early to 15 minutes late or On
Time (default = 1 minute early).
7. Press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE REMINDER,
and press ENTER again to close the menu. A Remind
icon for the selected frequency appears on the show tile.
See “Remind icons” on page 69.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

68
#01E_068-071_4250HPX95

68
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:23 AM

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

TV Guide On Screen™ Services (continued)
Remind features (continued)
Reminder notification banner
Based on your option settings, a notification banner will appear
on-screen, if your TV is on at the scheduled Reminder time.
At that time you can either press ENTER to hide the Reminder
banner, or highlight the show and press ENTER to tune to
the show.
If no choice is made within 3 minutes, the notification banner
closes automatically and completes the highlighted item (default
is HIDE REMINDERS).
Note: If more than two reminders are set for the same time,
arrows appear on the Reminder notification banner. Press yz
to highlight the shows.

Remind icons
Following is a description of the Remind icons that will appear
on the tile for a show set to Remind.
• Remind Once

—Displays a show reminder one time.

• Remind Regularly
—Displays a show reminder every
time the show airs on the same channel and starts at the same
time.
• Remind Daily
—Displays a show Reminder every
weekday (Monday through Friday) for the same channel and
start time.
Note: This icon displays for manual reminders only.

Remind conflict
A conflict message appears for the following reasons:
• A show set with an auto-tune Reminder has the same start
time as an existing auto-tune Reminder.
• A show set with an auto-tune Reminder overlaps with a
scheduled Recording.
Select one of these options:
• Auto-Tune Anyway—This show will override an existing
show set to auto-tune.
• Proceed, No Auto-Tune—Set the show as a Reminder but
do not auto-tune.
• Don’t Set This Reminder—Cancels the Reminder.

• Remind Suspend
—Reminder is Suspended due to a
schedule conflict (show remains in Schedule).
• Remind Off
—Keeps the Reminder in the Schedule list
but will not display a reminder until you change the
frequency.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_068-071_4250HPX95

69
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:24 AM

69

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

TV Guide On Screen™ Services (continued)
SETUP screen
After you complete the initial TV Guide On Screen™ setup (as
described in Chapter 5), you can change the following settings:
• Change system settings
• Change channel display
• Change default options
Highlight a choice, press ENTER, and follow the on-screen
instructions.

With SETUP highlighted in the Service Bar, press INFO to
display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the screen.

Change system settings
This option appears only after you have completed the initial
TV Guide On Screen™ setup process (as described in Chapter 5).
1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE SYSTEM
SETTINGS and press ENTER.

Change channel display
This option allows you to edit channel information that appears
in LISTINGS, including the following:
• Reorder the position the channels appear in LISTINGS.
• Change the “tune channel” number.
Note: The “tune channel” is the channel on which you receive
a station. For example, two viewers in the same zip code may
receive the same station on different channel numbers,
depending on whether they have Cable service or are using a
cable box.

• Switch a channel to one of the following settings:
– On (channel is always displayed in LISTINGS)
– Off (channel is never displayed in LISTINGS)
– Auto-Hide (channel is displayed in LISTINGS only
when program information is available)
1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE CHANNEL
DISPLAY and press ENTER.

2. Highlight the channel row you want to edit and press
ENTER to display the Grid Options panel menu.

3. To edit the options, press INFO and follow the on-screen
instructions.
2. Press ENTER again
to display the
Confirming Your
Settings screen.
3. Highlight one of the
options, press
ENTER, and follow
the on-screen
instructions.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

70
#01E_068-071_4250HPX95

70
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:25 AM

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

TV Guide On Screen™ Services (continued)
SETUP screen (continued)
Change default options

Record defaults

This option allows you to change default settings in the
following categories:
• General Defaults
• Record Defaults
• Remind Defaults

1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE DEFAULT
OPTIONS and press ENTER.
2. Highlight RECORD DEFAULTS and press MENU to
display the Record Defaults panel menu.

General defaults

1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE DEFAULT
OPTIONS and press ENTER.

2. Highlight GENERAL DEFAULTS and press MENU to
display the General defaults panel menu.

3. Enter the required information in the panel menu fields
(start time, end time, recorder choice, how long to keep a
Record event, the quality of the recording). See “Record
features” on page 66 for details on entering values in these
fields.
4. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and
press ENTER again to close the menu and accept the
changes (or highlight CANCEL to close the menu with
no changes).
Remind defaults

1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE DEFAULT
OPTIONS and press ENTER.
2. Highlight REMIND DEFAULTS and press MENU to
display the Remind Defaults panel menu.
3. Enter the following information in the panel menu fields:
• BOX SIZE: The initial Info Box size when you open the
TV Guide On Screen™ system. Choices are No, Small
(default), Large, and Last Used.
• BOX CYCLE: The Info Box size rotation when you press
INFO on the remote control when the TV Guide
On Screen™ system is open. Choices are No Only, Small
Only, Large Only, No & Small, No & Large, Small &
Large, and All (default).
• AUTO GUIDE: Automatic entry into the TV Guide
On Screen™ system when the TV is powered on. Choices
are On (default) and Off.
Note: Set the AUTO GUIDE to Off if you do not want the
TV Guide On Screen™ system to open every time you turn
on the TV.

3. Enter the required information in the panel menu fields
(power On TV, auto-tune, when to display the Remind
screen). See “Remind features” on page 68 for details on
entering values in these fields.
4. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and
press ENTER again to close the menu and accept the
changes (or highlight CANCEL to close the menu with
no changes).

4. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and
press ENTER again to close the menu and accept the
changes (or highlight CANCEL to close the menu with no
changes).
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_068-071_4250HPX95

71
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:25 AM

71

8

Using the TV’s features

Selecting the video input source to view
To select the video input source to view:
1. Press INPUT on the remote control or TV/VIDEO on the
TV side panel.
2. Press 0–9 to select the input source you want to view, which
will depend on the input terminals you used to connect
your devices (see Chapter 2).
The current signal source displays in the top right corner of
the Input Selection screen.
Input Selection
0
1
2
3
4
5
6

Numbers
INPUT

y

ANT 1

ANT 1
Video 1
Video 2
Video 3
ColorStream HD1
ColorStream HD2
HDMI 1

z

7 HDMI 2
8 PC
9 ANT 2
0 - 9 / INPUT to Select

Note:
• When the Input Selection screen is open, you also can use the yz
buttons on the remote control (or the CHANNEL yz buttons on
the side panel) to change the input.
• You can repeatedly press INPUT on the remote control or
TV/VIDEO on the TV side panel to change the input.
• To select an IEEE1394 input source, press the TheaterNet DEVICE
button on the remote control (see page 31 and 50).

Remote control

TV side panel

• If an IEEE1394 device is the current input, it will appear at the
bottom of the Input Selection list; however, it will not display in the
list if you change the input source.

CHANNEL yz

• You can label the video input sources according to the specific
devices you have connected to the TV (see “Labeling the video
input sources” on the next page).
• The source can be “hidden.” See page 73 for details.

TV/VIDEO

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

72
#01E_072-083_4250HPX95

72
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:25 AM

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Labeling the video input sources
You can label each video input source according to the type of
device you connected to each source, from the following preset
list of labels:
– – (default label)
Hide (to hide an unused input in the Input Selection
window)
Audio Receiver
VCR
Video Recorder
Laser Disk
Compact Disc
DVD
DTV
Satellite/DSS
Cable
Game Console
Note:
• If you set up devices in TheaterNet,™ the associated inputs are
automatically labeled and cannot be relabeled until you remove the
device from TheaterNet (see page 50).
• If you set up a cable box in VIDEO 1, that input will be labeled
automatically and cannot be relabeled until you remove the device
from the TV Guide On Screen™ setup.
• You cannot select IEEE1394 devices through the Input Selection
window; however, you can select and control IEEE1394 devices
through TheaterNet (see page 50).

To label the video input sources:
1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.
2. Highlight Input Labeling and press ENTER.
3. Press y or z to highlight the video source you want to
label.

Favorite Channels
Off

Closed Caption Advanced
Input Labeling
Menu Language

English

Home CH Setup

Navigate

Select

Note: If you select “Hide” for all of the input labels, the POP
feature will be disabled. If you then attempt to access the POP
feature, the message “Not available” will appear on-screen.

5. To save the new input labels, highlight Done and press
ENTER. To revert to the factory default labels, highlight
Reset and press ENTER.
Input labeling example:
The screen below left shows the default Input Selection screen
(with none of the inputs labeled). The screen below right is an
example of how you could label the inputs if you had connected
a DVD player to VIDEO 1, Cable TV to VIDEO 2, an audio
receiver to VIDEO 3, a video recorder to ColorStream HD1,
and a DTV set-top box to HDMI 1, and a satellite/DSS set-top
box to HDMI 2. Also note that the ColorStream HD2 input is
labeled “Hidden,” which means that the input will be skipped
over when INPUT or TV/VIDEO is pressed.
Input Selection
0
1
2
3
4
5

ANT 1

Input Selection

ANT 1

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

ANT 1
DVD
Cable
Audio Receiver
Video Receiver
ColorSteram HD2 (Hidden)
DTV
Satellite/DSS
8 PC
9 ANT 2

ANT 1
Video 1
Video 2
Video 3
ColorStream HD1
ColorStream HD2

6 HDMI 1
7 HDMI 2
8 PC
9 ANT 2
0 - 9 / INPUT to Select

Input Selection screen
with no inputs labeled

0 - 9 / INPUT to Select

Input Selection screen with
all inputs labeled except input 5,
which has been hidden.

To clear the input labels:
1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.
2. Highlight Input Labeling and press ENTER.
3. Highlight Reset and press ENTER.

Preferences
Closed Caption Mode

4. Press x or • to select the desired label for that input source.
If a particular input is not used, you can select “Hide” as
the label, which will cause that input to be “grayed out” in
the input list and skipped over when you press INPUT on
the remote control.

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

Input Labeling
Video 1

DVD

Video 2

Cable

Video 3

Audio Receiver

ColorStream HD 1

Video Receiver

ColorStream HD 2

Note: If you set up a device in TheaterNet, its input label will
not be cleared unless you remove the device from TheaterNet
(see page 50).

Hide

HDMI 1

DTV

HDMI 2

Satellite/DSS
--

PC
ANT 2

-Reset

Done

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_072-083_4250HPX95

73
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:26 AM

73

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Tuning channels
Using the ChannelBrowser™
The channel browser stores the most recently viewed channels (up to 32) in the channel history. This feature allows you to:
• Keep a separate, temporary* history of the last 32 channels tuned from each of three inputs: ANT 1, ANT 2, and Cable Box.
*Note: Turning off the TV will clear the channel history for all three inputs.

• Quickly surf and tune your recently viewed channels from the channel browser banner (illustrated below).
• Surf via Browse mode (to immediately tune channels as you highlight them in the channel browser banner) or Select mode (to surf
over channels in the browser banner before you select one to tune).
• Set a “HOME” channel for the ANT 1, ANT 2, and Cable Box inputs.
To open the channel browser banner: Press x ( ), • ( ), or ENTER on the remote control.
– Press x ( ) to surf back from the most recently viewed channel through the last 32 channels that were tuned from the current
input, which are automatically stored in the channel history for the current input (ANT 1, ANT 2, or Cable Box only).
– Press • ( ) to surf forward from the previous channels in the channel history up to the most recently viewed channel.
Elements of the channel browser banner
Active channel
status

Highlighted channel
(Displays with a yellow
background in Select mode.
Displays with a yellow
outline in Browse mode.)

(Displays in this area
only if available.)

Channels stored
in the channel
history

Active channel

Home channel instructions

(In Browse mode, because the highlighted
channel is tuned automatically, the active
channel and the highlighted channel
will always be the same.)

[Press x ( ) or • ( )
to surf the other channels
in the channel history.]

12-3

14

26-1

17-2

3

12345678

ABCD-DTV

QRS

TUV

XYZ

Select Mode

CB

Current mode

ANT 1
Current
input

(Select or Browse)

CABLE 3
Current
antenna type
(cable or TV)

Active
channel
number

XYZ

480p

Channel call
letters
(if available)

Resolution

Hold HOME key
3 sec to program

17-2
Home channel

To toggle between Browse mode and Select mode:
After opening the channel browser banner, press y or z to toggle between Browse mode and Select mode. The “Current mode” field
on the channel browser banner will flash green. Note: The channel browser banner opens in Browse mode by default.
To tune to a channel in Browse mode:
1. While watching TV, press x ( ) or •( ) to open the
channel browser banner and surf back to a previous channel
or forward to the next channel in the channel history.
In Browse mode, when you stop on a channel number in
the browser banner, it will be highlighted with a yellow
outline and the TV will automatically tune to the channel.
2. Press EXIT to close the channel browser banner.
3

2

Browse Mode

ANT 1

102-1
CABLE Ch.102-1

Hold HOME key
3 sec to program

1080i

Ch.3

In Browse mode, the highlighted channel number is outlined
in yellow and the channel will be tuned to automatically.
Note: The channel browser close automatically if you do not
make a selection within 60 seconds.

To tune to a channel in Select mode:
1. While watching TV, press x ( ) or •( ) to open the
channel browser banner and surf back to a previous channel
or forward to the next channel in the channel history.
In Select mode, when you stop on a channel number in
the browser banner, it will be highlighted with a yellow
background but the TV will not automatically tune to the
channel.
2. Press ENTER to tune the TV to the highlighted channel.
3. Press EXIT to close the channel browser banner.
3

2

Select Mode

ANT 1

102-1
CABLE Ch.102-1

#01E_072-083_4250HPX95

74
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

1080i

Ch.3

In Select mode, the highlighted channel number has a
yellow background. Press ENTER to tune to the channel.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

74

Hold HOME key
3 sec to program

7/12/05, 9:26 AM

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Tuning channels (continued)
Using the ChannelBrowser™ (continued)
Adding and clearing channels in the
channel history

Setting a channel as the “Home” channel
for an input

Adding channels to the channel history

To set a channel as Home using the remote control:
1. Tune the TV to the channel you would like to set as the
Home channel for the current antenna input.
2. Press and hold the HOME ( ) button on the remote
control for 3 seconds. When the Home channel is saved,
the channel browser banner will appear at the bottom of
the screen with the home icon flashing green.

The channel browser automatically creates a history of the
last 32 channels that were tuned in the current input (ANT 1,
ANT 2, and Cable Box inputs only). A separate history will be
stored for each of these inputs.
If you change the input you are viewing:
a) you will begin a channel history for that input if one did
not exist; or
b) you will return to the existing channel history for that input
if one had already been started.
The channel browser will store the following channels:
• All channels that are tuned using the numeric buttons on the
remote control.
• All channels that are tuned for at least 7 seconds using the
CH yz buttons or the FAV CH y z buttons on the remote
control.
Note:
• The channel browser banner will not appear when the POP double
window is open; however, channels tuned while the POP double
window is open will be added to the channel browser history for the
current input.
• The channel browser banner will not appear in the FAV SCAN
(favorite scan) multi-window. Channels that appear in the FAV SCAN
multi-window will not be added to the channel browser history;
however, channels that are tuned from the FAV SCAN multi-window
for at least 7 seconds will be added to the channel history.

Clearing channels from the channel history

• Turning off the TV will clear all three channel histories
(ANT 1, ANT 2, and Cable Box).
• Removing the CableCARD™ will clear the channel history
for the ANT 1 input.
• Reconfiguring the ANT 1, ANT 2, or Cable Box input
will clear the channel history for the newly configured
input(s).
Note: See page 46 for details on configuring the antenna inputs.

Note: You can set a different Home channel for each input
(ANT 1, ANT 2, and Cable Box inputs only).

To set a channel as Home using the menus:
1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.
2. Highlight Home CH Setup and press ENTER. The Home
CH Setup window will display.
Home CH Setup
ANT 1

--

ANT 2

--

Cable Box

-Reset

Done

Note: "Cable Box" will appear in the Home CH Setup
window only if you connected a cable box to your TV.

3. Use the yz buttons to select the input for which you want
to set the Home channel.
4. Use the numeric and dash (–) buttons on the remote
control to enter the desired Home channel for each input.
5. To save your entries, highlight Done and press ENTER.
To clear your entries, highlight Reset and press ENTER.
To tune to the Home channel:
While an input that has a set
Home channel is active, press the
HOME ( ) button on the
remote control.
Note: If you press the HOME
button while an input other than
an antenna or Cable Box input is
selected, the TV will tune to the
most recently tuned Home
channel and input.

x /BACK
•/NEXT

HOME (

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_072-083_4250HPX95

75
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:26 AM

)

75

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Tuning channels (continued)
Tuning your favorite channels
To tune to the channels you programmed as Favorite Channels,
see page 48.

Tuning to the next programmed channel
To tune to the next programmed channel:
Press CHANNEL yz on the remote control or TV side panel.
Note:
• This feature will not work unless you program channels into the
TV’s channel memory (see page 47).
• If you are recording a digital channel, you will only be able to
change analog channels while the recording is in progress. If you
are recording an analog channel, you will only be able to change
digital channels while the recording is in progress. This is
because the TV tuner that is being recorded (digital or analog)
will be locked on the channel that is currently recording.

Tuning to a specific channel
(programmed or unprogrammed)
Tuning analog channels:
Press the Channel Number buttons (0–9) on the remote
control. For example, to select channel 125, press 1, 2, 5.
Tuning digital channels:
Press the Channel Number buttons (0–9) on the remote
control, followed by the – (dash) button and then the subchannel number. For example, to select digital channel 125-1,
press 1, 2, 5, –, 1.
Note: If a digital channel is not programmed—either through
the automatic channel scan (page 47) or the channel add/
delete function (page 48)—you will have to tune the RF
channel using the Channel Number and Dash buttons on the
remote control.

Switching between two channels using
Channel Return
The Channel Return feature allows you to switch between two
channels without entering an actual channel number each time.
1. Select the first channel you want to view.
2. Select a second channel using the Channel Number buttons
(and the dash (–) button if selecting a digital channel).
3. Press CH RTN on the remote control. The previous
channel will display. Each time you press CH RTN, the TV
will switch back and forth between the last two channels
that were selected.
Note: If you press CH RTN from a non-antenna input, the TV
will return to the last-viewed ANT input and channel. If you
are currently recording a program, this feature will not be
available.

Switching between two channels using
SurfLock™
The SurfLock™ feature temporarily “memorizes” one channel
in the CH RTN button, so you can return to that channel
quickly from any other channel by pressing CH RTN. To
memorize a channel in the CH RTN button:
1. Select the channel you want to program into the CH RTN
button.
2. Press and hold CH RTN for about 2 seconds until the
message “Channel Memorized” appears on the screen. The
channel has been programmed into the CH RTN button.
3. You can then change channels repeatedly, and when you
press CH RTN, the memorized channel will be selected.
The TV will return to the memorized channel one time only.
Once you press CH RTN and then change channels again, the
CH RTN memory will be cleared and the button will function
as Channel Return, by switching back and forth between the last
two channels that were selected.

Channel Numbers
— (dash)

CHANNEL yz

CH RTN
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

76
#01E_072-083_4250HPX95

76
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:26 AM

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Selecting the picture size
You can view many program formats in a variety of picture
sizes—Natural, TheaterWide 1, TheaterWide 2, TheaterWide 3,
and Full—as described below and on the next page.
The way the image displays in any of the picture sizes will vary
depending on the format of the program you are viewing. Select
the picture size that displays the current program the way that
looks best to you.
Your picture size preferences can be saved for each input on your
TV.

Numbers
PIC SIZE

y

To select the picture size:
1. Press PIC SIZE on the remote control.
2. While the Picture Size menu is on-screen, press the
corresponding number button (0–4) to select the desired
picture size.

z

Note:
Picture Size
0
1
2
3
4

You also can select the picture size using the
menu system. Select Picture Size in the Video/
Theater Settings menu. Select the input you
wish to save your picture size settings for. To
save your settings, highlight Done and press
ENTER.

Natural
TheaterWide 1
TheaterWide 2
TheaterWide 3
Full
0 - 4 / PIC SIZE to Select

Note:

Theater Settings

• You also can repeatedly press PIC SIZE to select the desired
picture size (or press yz on the remote control while the
Picture Size screen is open).

Picture Size

Film

Auto Aspect Ratio
Reset

Natural picture size
• The image is displayed close to its originally formatted
proportion. Some program formats will display with
sidebars and/or bars at the top and bottom.
Natural picture size example: The way the image displays will
vary depending on the format of the program you are currently
watching.

On
Done

NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE
EFFECTS ON PLASMA DISPLAY
Avoid displaying stationary images on your
Plasma display for extended periods of
time. Fixed (non-moving) images
(including, but not limited to, PIP/POP
windows, closed captions, video game
patterns, TV station logos, stock tickers,
and websites) and special formats that do
not use the entire screen, can become
permanently ingrained in the Plasma
display and cause subtle, but permanent,
ghost images. This type of damage is
NOT COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY.
See pages 4 and 5 for details.

Conventional picture in Natural size on
your wide-screen TV

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_072-083_4250HPX95

--

Cinema Mode

• “Full” may not be available for some program formats (it will
be “grayed out” in the Picture Size screen).

Conventional picture on a
conventional TV screen

Natural

Picture Scroll

77
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:26 AM

77

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Selecting the picture size (continued)
Note:
• If you select one of the TheaterWide® picture
sizes, the top and bottom edges of the
picture (including subtitles or captions) may
be hidden. To view the hidden edges, either
scroll the picture (TheaterWide 2 and 3 only)
or try viewing the program in Full or Natural
picture size.

TheaterWide 1 picture size (For 4:3 format
program)

• The center of the picture remains close to its
original proportion, but the left and right
edges are stretched wider to fill the screen.

• When selecting the picture size, the way
the image displays will vary depending on
the format of the program you are
currently watching.
TheaterWide 1 picture size example

Using these functions to change the
picture size (i.e., changing the height/
width ratio) for any purpose other than
your private viewing may be prohibited
under the Copyright Laws of the United
States and other countries, and may
subject you to civil and criminal liability.

TheaterWide 2 picture size (for letter box
programs)

• The picture is stretched wider to fill the width
of the screen, but only slightly stretched taller.
• The top and bottom edges of the picture are
hidden. To view the hidden areas, see
“Scrolling the TheaterWide® picture” on the
next page.

ABCDEFG----------------

NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE
EFFECTS ON PLASMA DISPLAY
Avoid displaying stationary images on your
Plasma display for extended periods of
time. Fixed (non-moving) images
(including, but not limited to, PIP/POP
windows, closed captions, video game
patterns, TV station logos, stock tickers,
and websites) and special formats that do
not use the entire screen, can become
permanently ingrained in the Plasma
display and cause subtle, but permanent,
ghost images. This type of damage is
NOT COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY.
See pages 4 and 5 for details.

TheaterWide 2 picture size example

TheaterWide 3 picture size (for letter box
programs with subtitles)

• The picture is stretched wider to fill the width
of the screen, but only slightly stretched taller.
• The top and bottom edges are hidden. To view
the hidden areas (such as subtitles or captions),
see “Scrolling the TheaterWide® picture” on
the next page.

ABCDEFG----------------

ABCDEFG--------------------------

TheaterWide 3 picture size example

Full picture size (for 16:9 [480i, 480p] source
programs only)

• If receiving a squeezed 4:3 format program, the
picture is stretched wider to fill the width of
the screen, but not stretched taller.
• None of the picture is hidden.

Full picture size example

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

78
#01E_072-083_4250HPX95

78
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:26 AM

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Scrolling the TheaterWide® picture
(TheaterWide 2 and 3 only)
You can set separate scroll settings for TheaterWide 2 and
TheaterWide 3 modes for each input.
To set the scroll settings:
1. Press INPUT on the remote control or TV/VIDEO on the
TV to select the input for which you want to set the picture
size and scroll settings.
2. Press MENU and open the Video menu.
3. Highlight Theater Settings and press ENTER.

Video
Picture Settings
Advanced Picture Settings
Theater Settings

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

Theater Settings
TheaterWide 3

Picture Scroll

When the auto aspect ratio feature is set to On, the picture size
is automatically selected when one of the following input
sources is received:
• A 480i signal from the VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3,
ColorStream HD-1, or ColorStream HD-2 input.
• A 1080i, 480i, 480p, or 720p signal from the HDMI input.
Automatic aspect size

Aspect ratio
of signal source

(automatically selected
when Auto Aspect is On)

4:3 normal
4:3 letter box
16:9 full
Not defined
(no ID-1 data or )
HDMI aspect data)

Natural (with sidebars)
TheaterWide 2
Full
User-selected picture size
(see pages 77–78)

Note:
• The auto aspect ratio feature is not applicable to antenna or Cable input
sources.

4. In the Picture Size field, select either TheaterWide 2 or
TheaterWide 3 (you cannot scroll in any other mode).
5. Press z to highlight the Picture Scroll field.
6. Press x or • to scroll the picture up and down as needed,
from –10 to +20.
Picture Size

Using the auto aspect ratio feature

• The auto aspect ratio feature is not available when the POP doublewindow is open, the Freeze mode is active, or the TV Guide On Screen™
system is open.

To turn on the auto aspect ratio feature:
1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.
2. Highlight Theater Settings and press ENTER.

0

Cinema Mode

Film

Auto Aspect Ratio

On

Video
Picture Settings

Done

Reset

Advanced Picture Settings
Theater Settings

7. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press ENTER.
NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE
EFFECTS ON PLASMA DISPLAY
Avoid displaying stationary images on your
Plasma display for extended periods of
time. Fixed (non-moving) images
(including, but not limited to, PIP/POP
windows, closed captions, video game
patterns, TV station logos, stock tickers,
and websites) and special formats that do
not use the entire screen, can become
permanently ingrained in the Plasma
display and cause subtle, but permanent,
ghost images. This type of damage is
NOT COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY.
See pages 4 and 5 for details.

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

3. In the Auto Aspect Ratio field, select On.
Theater Settings
Picture Size

Natural

Picture Scroll

-1

Cinema Mode

Film

Auto Aspect Ratio
Reset

79
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

On
Done

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press ENTER.
To turn off the auto aspect ratio feature:
Select Off in step 3 above.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_072-083_4250HPX95

EXIT Exit

7/12/05, 9:26 AM

79

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Selecting the cinema mode (480i signals only)
When you view a DVD (480i signal; 3:2 pulldown processed)
from a DVD player connected to the VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2,
ColorStream HD1/HD2 (component video), or HDMI inputs
on the TV, smoother motion can be obtained by setting the
Cinema Mode to Film.
To set the Cinema Mode to Film:
1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.
2. Highlight Theater Settings and press ENTER.

Video
Picture Settings
Advanced Picture Settings
Theater Settings

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

3. In the Cinema Mode field, select Film.
Theater Settings
Picture Size

Natural

Picture Scroll

-1

Cinema Mode

Film

Auto Aspect Ratio

On

Reset

Done

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press ENTER.
To set the Cinema Mode to Video:
Select Video in step 3 above.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

80
#01E_072-083_4250HPX95

80
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:26 AM

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Using the POP features
Using the POP double-window feature
Note:

The POP (picture-out-picture) double-window feature splits the screen into two
windows so you can watch two programs at the same time.

• When the main window is in the ANT1 or ANT2
mode, the ANT1 and ANT2 inputs cannot be
selected for the POP window.

To display a program in the POP window:
1. Select the program you want to watch in the main window.
2. Press SPLIT to open the POP double-window.

• When the main window is in Video 1/2/3,
ColorStream HD1/HD2, HDMI 1, or HDMI 2
mode, those inputs cannot be selected for the POP
window.

POP double-window

• You cannot view IEEE1394 source programs in the
POP window.
• You cannot view two video or two antenna sources
in both the main and POP windows simultaneously.
(You can view a video source in one window and
an antenna source in the other.)

POP window

Main window
ANT1
TV12

POP

• The FREEZE feature is not available when the POP
double-window is open. If you press FREEZE
when the double-window is open, the message
“Not available” will appear.

Video1

Green border
(denotes active window)

3. Press • to highlight the POP (right) window. When highlighted, the window
will have a green border.
4. Press INPUT to open the POP Input Selection window. Select the input source
for the POP window by pressing the corresponding Number button (0–9). The
current source displays in purple in the POP Input Selection window.

Numbers
INPUT

POP Input Selection
0
1
2
3
4
5

•

ANT 1
Video 1
Video 2
Video 3
ColorStream HD1
ColorStream HD2

ENTER

6 HDMI 1
7 HDMI 2
8 PC
9 ANT 2
0 - 9 / INPUT to Select

SPLIT

To close the POP window and tune to the highlighted window:
Press ENTER after highlighting the window you want to view as a normal picture.
To close the POP window:
Press SPLIT or EXIT.

NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE
EFFECTS ON PLASMA DISPLAY

Notes about recording:
• If the POP window is open and you attempt to start recording, the POP window will close and
recording will start.
• If you use the TV’s remote control to start recording, you will not be able to open the POP window
and the message “Not Available” will appear on-screen.
• It is recommended that you use the TV’s remote control to start recording. If you use a device other
than the TV’s remote control to start recording, you may be able to open the POP window during
the recording process. If this happens, the recorded audio will reflect the audio of the active window
(main or POP), which may not be the audio you intended to record.

Avoid displaying stationary images on your Plasma
display for extended periods of time. Fixed (nonmoving) images (including, but not limited to, PIP/
POP windows, closed captions, video game
patterns, TV station logos, stock tickers, and
websites) and special formats that do not use the
entire screen, can become permanently ingrained
in the Plasma display and cause subtle, but
permanent, ghost images. This type of damage
is NOT COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY. See
pages 4 and 5 for details.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_072-083_4250HPX95

81
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:26 AM

81

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Using the POP features (continued)
Switching the speaker audio (main or POP)
While the POP window is open, press x or • to switch the sound (main or POP) that
is output from the TV speakers (and from the VARIABLE AUDIO OUT terminals).
The window with the active sound is outlined with a green border.
Example: Press x

Example: Press •

x•

POP double-window aspect ratio
The POP double-window feature displays each picture according to its input signal
aspect ratio, as illustrated in the examples below.

480i

480i

480p/720p/1080i

480i

Note:
• The auto aspect ratio feature (page 79) does not
operate in POP double-window mode.
• Aspect ratio is the ratio of width to height of the
picture.

NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE
EFFECTS ON PLASMA DISPLAY
Avoid displaying stationary images on your Plasma
display for extended periods of time. Fixed (nonmoving) images (including, but not limited to, PIP/
POP windows, closed captions, video game
patterns, TV station logos, stock tickers, and
websites) and special formats that do not use the
entire screen, can become permanently ingrained
in the Plasma display and cause subtle, but
permanent, ghost images. This type of damage
is NOT COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY. See
pages 4 and 5 for details.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

82
#01E_072-083_4250HPX95

82
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:26 AM

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Using the FREEZE feature
1. When viewing the TV, press FREEZE to make the picture a still picture.
2. To return to the moving picture, either press FREEZE again, press EXIT, or press
any other button.
Note:
• The FREEZE feature is not available when the POP double-window or FAV SCAN
multi-window is open. If you press FREEZE when either window is open, the message
“Not available” will appear.
• If the TV is left in FREEZE mode, after 15 minutes it will automatically release the
FREEZE mode and return to the moving picture.

Using the FREEZE function for any
purpose other than your private viewing
may be prohibited under the Copyright
Laws of the United States and other
countries, and may subject you to civil
and criminal liability.

x

Moving picture

y
z

•

ENTER

Still picture

EXIT

Using the favorite channel scan feature
FREEZE
FAV SCAN

You can use this feature to quickly scan and tune the channels you programmed as
favorite channels from a nine-picture multi-window.
Note: To use the favorite channel scan feature, you must first program channels into the
favorite channel memory. See “Programming your favorite channels” on page 49.

NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE
EFFECTS ON PLASMA DISPLAY

To scan and tune your favorite channels:
1. Press FAV SCAN. The TV will display the channels you programmed as favorite
channels for the current ANT input in a nine-picture multi-window.
(To display the channels you programmed as favorite channels for the other input,
you must change antenna inputs first (page 72), and then press FAV SCAN.)
1

2
2

4

4–1

6

CABLE

18

3

5

7

4–2
6
13

11
8

18

Avoid displaying stationary images on your
Plasma display for extended periods of
time. Fixed (non-moving) images
(including, but not limited to, PIP/POP
windows, closed captions, video game
patterns, TV station logos, stock tickers,
and websites) and special formats that do
not use the entire screen, can become
permanently ingrained in the Plasma
display and cause subtle, but permanent,
ghost images. This type of damage is
NOT COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY.
See pages 4 and 5 for details.

9
31

36

2. Highlight the window for the channel you want to view:
• Either... press the channel’s multi-window position number (1-9, as illustrated
above, and not the actual channel number) to highlight the window;
• or... use the y z x • buttons to highlight the window.
The highlighted window will display as a moving picture.
3. Press ENTER to tune the TV to the highlighted channel and close the multi-window.

2

4–1

4–2

6

11

13

18

31

36

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_072-083_4250HPX95

83
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:26 AM

83

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Adjusting the picture
Selecting the picture mode

Adjusting the picture quality

You can select your desired picture settings from four picture
modes, as described below.

You can adjust the picture quality (contrast, brightness, color,
tint, and sharpness) to your personal preferences.

Mode

Picture Quality

Selection

Sports
Standard
Movie
Preference

Bright and dynamic picture (factory setting)
Standard picture settings (factory setting)
Lower contrast for darkened room (factory setting)
Your personal preferences

Contrast
Brightness
Color
Tint
Sharpness

To select the picture mode:
Press PIC MODE on the remote control.
The following popup menu appears onscreen.
Picture Settings

x Pressing •
lower
darker
paler
reddish
softer

higher
lighter
deeper
greenish
sharper

To adjust the picture quality:
1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.
2. Highlight Picture Settings and press ENTER.

Mode: Standard

Mode

Standard

Repeatedly press PIC MODE to cycle
PIC
among the modes or use x or • to
MODE
select the modes.
To select the picture mode using the menu system:
1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.
2. Highlight Picture Settings and press ENTER.

Video
Picture Settings
Advanced Picture Settings
Theater Settings

3. Press y or z to select the picture quality you want to adjust
(Contrast, Brightness, Color, Tint, or Sharpness), and then
x and • to adjust the setting, as described in the table
above.
ANT 1

Picture Settings
Mode

Sports

Contrast

100

Brightness

50

Advanced Picture Settings

Color

50

Theater Settings

Tint

0

Sharpness

50

Video
Picture Settings

3. In the Mode field, select the mode you prefer.
ANT 1

Picture Settings
Mode

Picture Settings

100

Brightness

50

Color

50

Tint

0

Sharpness

50

Mode

70

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press ENTER.

Reset

Picture Settings

Done

Mode: Preference

Sharpness

Sports

Contrast

Reset

The picture qualities you adjusted are automatically saved in the
Preference mode (see “Selecting the picture mode,” above left).

Done

Mode: Standard
Standard

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press ENTER.
Note:
• The picture mode you selected is for the current input
selection only (ANT 1 in the example above). You can select
a different picture mode for each input selection.
• If you select one of the factory-set picture modes (Sports,
Standard, or Movie) and then change a picture quality setting
(for example, increase the contrast or change the color
temperature), the picture mode automatically changes to
Preference in the Picture Settings menu.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

84
#01E_084-093_4250HPX95

84
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:28 AM

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Adjusting the picture (continued)
Using the color management feature
The color management feature allows you to adjust the hue and
saturation of 6 colors: red, green, blue, yellow, magenta, and
cyan.
To select Color Management preferences:
1. Press Menu and open the Video menu.
2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER.

7. Press Enter to return to the Color Management Window.
8. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press ENTER.
Note:
• If you select Off in step 4 above, you cannot adjust the Hue or
Saturation.
• If you select one of the factory-set picture modes (Sports,
Standard, or Movie) and then change the Color Management
to “On”, the picture mode automatically changes to
Preference in the Picture Settings menu.

Video
Picture Settings
Advanced Picture Settings
Theater Settings

3. Highlight the Color Management field, and press ENTER.
ANT 1

Advanced Picture Settings
Dynamic Contrast

On

MPEG Noise Reduction

Low

CableClear

Auto

Color Temperature

Cool

Color Management
Reset

Done

4. Highlight Color Management, and then press x or • to
select On.
Color Management
Color Managemant

On
Hue
–15

Red
Green
Blue

0

0

–15

+15

Yellow
Magenta

Saturation
+15

0

0

–15

+15

0

0

Cyan

Done

Reset

5. Press y or z to highlight the color you want to adjust,
then press ENTER.
6. Press x or • to adjust the Hue or Saturation setting.
Hue

+2

Saturation

+2

Note: Pressing y or z will switch between the Hue and
Saturation adjusting windows.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_084-093_4250HPX95

85
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:29 AM

85

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Adjusting the picture (continued)
Using CableClear® /DNR (digital noise
reduction)
The CableClear® digital noise reduction feature allows you to
reduce visible interference in your TV picture. This may be
useful when receiving a broadcast with a weak signal (especially
a Cable channel) or playing a noisy video cassette or disc. This
feature is enabled for 480i signals only.
Note: The CableClear/DNR feature does not function in
ColorStream, HDMI (DVI), ATSC, IEEE1394, and digital Cable
modes.

To select CableClear/DNR preferences:
1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.
2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER.

Selecting the color temperature
You can change the quality of the picture by selecting from three
preset color temperatures (cool, medium, and warm), as
described below.
Mode

Picture Quality

Cool
Medium
Warm

blueish
neutral
reddish

To select the color temperature:
1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.
2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER.

Video
Picture Settings
Advanced
PictureSettings
Settings
Advanced Picture

Video

Theater Settings

Picture Settings
Advanced Picture Settings
Theater Settings

3. In the CableClear/DNR field, select your desired setting.

ANT 1

Advanced Picture Settings

ANT 1

Advanced Picture Settings

3. In the Color Temperature field, select the mode you prefer
(Cool, Medium, or Warm).

On

Dynamic Contrast

MPEG Noise Reduction

Low

MPEG Noise Reduction

Low

CableClear

Auto

CableClear

Auto

Color Temperature

Cool

Color Temperature

Cool

Dynamic Contrast

Color Management

Color Management

Reset

Done

Reset

Note:
• If the current input is Antenna, Video 1, Video 2, or Video 3,
the menu will display the text “CableClear.” The available
selections are Off, Low, Middle, High, and Auto.
• If the current input is ColorStream HD1, ColorStream HD2 or
HDMI and the video resolution is 480i, the menu will display
the text “DNR.” The available selections are Off, Low, Middle,
High, and Auto. Auto will react proportionally to the strength
of the noise. Low, Middle, and High will reduce the noise in
varying degrees from lowest to highest respectively.

Note:
If you select one of the factory-set picture modes (Sports,
Standard, or Movie) and then change the color temperature
mode, the picture mode automatically changes to Preference in
the Picture Settings menu.

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press ENTER.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

86
86
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Done

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press ENTER.

• If the current input is ColorStream HD1, ColorStream HD2, or
HDMI and the video resolution is not 480i, the menu will
display the text “DNR”.

#01E_084-093_4250HPX95

On

7/12/05, 9:30 AM

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Adjusting the picture (continued)
Using MPEG noise reduction

Using dynamic contrast

The MPEG noise reduction feature allows you to reduce visible
interference caused by MPEG compression. Choices for MPEG
noise reduction are High, Medium, Low and Off. Off is
automatically selected when this feature is disabled (“grayed
out”). This feature is not available in the PC input mode.

When dynamic contrast is set to “On,” the TV will detect
changes in the picture quality that affect the appearance of your
contrast settings and automatically adjust the video.When
dynamic contrast is set to “Off,” the settings selected in the
Contrast field in Picture Settings will be used.

To select MPEG Noise Reduction preferences:
1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.
2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER.

To select dynamic contrast preferences:
1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.
2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER.

Video

Video

Picture Settings

Picture Settings

Advanced Picture Settings

Advanced Picture Settings

Theater Settings

Theater Settings

3. In the MPEG Noise Reduction field, select your desired
setting.
Dynamic Contrast

On

MPEG Noise Reduction

Off

CableClear

Auto

Color Temperature

Cool

MPEG Noise Reduction

Off

CableClear

Auto

Color Temperature

Cool

Reset

Done

Done

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press ENTER.

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press ENTER.
Note:
If you select one of the factory-set picture modes (Sports,
Standard, or Movie) and then change the dynamic contrast to
“On,” the picture mode automatically changes to Preference in
the Picture Settings menu.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_084-093_4250HPX95

On

Color Management

Color Management
Reset

ANT 1

Advanced Picture Settings
Dynamic Contrast

ANT 1

Advanced Picture Settings

3. In the Dynamic Contrast field, select either On or Off.

87
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:30 AM

87

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Using the closed caption mode
The closed caption mode has two options:
• Captions—An on-screen display of the dialog, narration,
and sound effects of TV programs and videos that are
closed captioned (usually marked “CC” in program guides).
• Text—An on-screen display of information not related to
the current program, such as weather or stock data (when
provided by individual stations).
To view captions or text:
1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.
2. Highlight Closed Caption Mode and then press •.
3. Press z or y to select the desired closed caption mode and
press ENTER.

Preferences
Favorite Channels

Off

Closed Caption Mode

Off

Closed Caption Advanced

CC2
CC3

Menu Language

English

T1
T2

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

Note:
• This feature is available for digital channels only.
• You cannot set the Caption Text and Background as the same
color.

To customize the closed captions:
1. Press MENU and open
the Preferences menu.
Preferences
Favorite Channels
2. Highlight Closed
Closed Caption Mode
CC1
Caption Advanced and
Closed Caption Advanced
Input Labeling
press ENTER.
English
Menu Language
3. Press y or z to
highlight the
characteristic you want
to change, and then
press x or • to select the format for that characteristic.
4. To save the
Advanced Closed Captions
new settings,
Caption Size
Auto
Auto
Caption Text Type
highlight
Auto
Caption Text Edge
Done and
Auto
Caption Text Color
press
Auto
Background Color
ENTER. To
Reset
Done
revert to the
factory
defaults, highlight Reset and press ENTER.
Navigate

CC4

Home CH Setup

You can customize the closed caption display characteristics by
changing the text size, type, edge, color, and the background
color.

Home CH Setup

CC1

Input Labeling

Advanced closed captions

EXIT Exit

• To view captions:
Highlight CC1,
CC2, CC3, or
CC4. (CC1 displays
translation of the
primary language in
your area.)
Giant pandas eat leaves.
Note: If the
program or video
you selected is not closed captioned, no captions will display
on-screen.

• To view text:
Highlight T1, T2,
T3, or T4.
Note: If text is not
available in your
WORLD WEATHER
Temps
F
C
area, a black
LONDON
51
11
MOSCOW
57
14
rectangle may
PARIS
53
12
ROME
66
19
appear on your
TOKYO
65
18
screen. If this
happens, turn the Closed Caption Mode Off.

Current
Weather
Clear
Cloudy
Clear
Cloudy
Rain

• To turn off the Closed Caption mode:
Select Off in step 3 above.
Note: A closed caption signal may not display in the following situations:
• When a videotape has been dubbed
• When the signal reception is weak
• When the signal reception is non-standard

#01E_084-093_4250HPX95

88
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

Caption Size

Auto, Small, Standard, Large

Caption Text Type

Auto, Default, Mono w. Serif, Prof. w. Serif,
Mono w/o Serif, Prop w/o Serif, Casual,
Cursive, Small Capitals

Caption Text Edge

Auto, None, Raised, Depressed, Uniform,
Left Drop Shadow, Right Drop shadow

Caption Text Color

Auto, Black, White, Red, Green, Blue,
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan

Background Color

Auto, Black, White, Red, Green, Blue,
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan

NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE EFFECTS ON
PLASMA DISPLAY
Avoid displaying stationary images on your Plasma display for
extended periods of time. Fixed (non-moving) images (including,
but not limited to, PIP/POP windows, closed captions, video game
patterns, TV station logos, stock tickers, and websites) and
special formats that do not use the entire screen, can become
permanently ingrained in the Plasma display and cause subtle,
but permanent, ghost images. This type of damage is NOT
COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY. See pages 4 and 5 for
details.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

88

Select

7/12/05, 9:31 AM

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Using the closed caption mode (continued)
Digital closed captions
You can use the Digital CC/Audio selector to select digital
closed caption services (if available), which will temporarily
override closed captions for digital channels only.
When such services are not available, the Digital CC/Audio
selector presents a default list of services. If the selected service is
not available, the next best service will be used instead.
To select digital closed captions:
1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu.
2. Highlight Digital CC/Audio Selector and press ENTER.

Applications
TV Guide On Screen
Audio Player
Picture Viewer
Digital CC/Audio Selector
CableCARD

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

3. Press y or z to select Closed Caption, and then press x or
• to select the desired service.
Audio

CC 1
Service 1

Closed Caption

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_084-093_4250HPX95

89
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:31 AM

89

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Adjusting the audio
Muting the sound

Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts

Press MUTE to partially reduce (1/2 Mute) or turn off (Mute)
the sound. Each time you press MUTE, the mute mode will
change in the following order.

The multi-channel TV sound (MTS) feature allows you to
output high-fidelity stereo sound. MTS also can transmit a
second audio program (SAP) containing a second language,
music, or other audio information (when provided by individual
stations).
The MTS feature is not available when the TV is in VIDEO
mode. When the TV receives a stereo or SAP broadcast, the
word “STEREO” or “SAP” appears on-screen when RECALL is
pressed.

→ 1/2 Mute → Mute → Volume →
If the closed caption mode is set to Off when you select
“MUTE” mode, the closed caption feature is automatically
activated. To mute the audio without automatically activating
the closed caption feature, use the VOL z button to set the
volume to 0. See “Using the closed caption mode” on page 88
for more information on closed caption modes.

VOL z

Audio

RECALL
MUTE

Audio Settings
Advanced Audio Settings
Audio Setup

3. In the MTS field, select Stereo.

Using the digital audio selector
You can use the Digital CC/Audio selector to conveniently
switch between audio tracks on a digital channel (for those
channels that have multiple audio tracks). This temporarily
overrides the audio track chosen by the language option under
Audio Setup.
1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu.
2. Highlight Digital CC/
Audio Selector and press
Applications
ENTER.
TV Guide On Screen
Audio Player
3. Press y or z to select
Picture Viewer
Digital CC/Audio Selector
Audio, and then press x
CableCARD
or • to select the desired
service.
Navigate

Audio

CC 1
Service 1

Closed Caption

To listen to stereo sound:
1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.
2. Highlight Audio Setup and press ENTER.

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

Audio Setup
MTS

Stereo

Language

English

Speakers

On

Optical Output Format
Reset

Dolby Digital
Done

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
ENTER. To reset the settings to the factory defaults,
highlight Reset and press ENTER.
Note:
• You can leave the TV in Stereo mode because it automatically
outputs the type of sound being broadcast (stereo or monaural).
• If the stereo sound is noisy, select Mono to reduce the noise.

To listen to an alternate language on an ATSC digital station
(if available):
Highlight the Language field in step 3 above, and then press x
or • to select the language you prefer.
To listen to a second audio program on an analog station (if
available):
Select SAP in step 3 above.
Note:
• A second audio program (SAP) can be heard only on those TV
stations that offer it. For example, a station might broadcast another
language as a second audio program. If you have SAP on, you will
see the current program on the screen but hear the other language
instead of the program’s normal audio.
• If you have SAP on and the station you are watching is not
broadcasting a second audio program, the station’s normal audio
will be output. However, occasionally there is no sound at all in SAP
mode. If this happens, set the MTS feature to Stereo mode.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

90
#01E_084-093_4250HPX95

90
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:32 AM

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Adjusting the audio (continued)
Adjusting the audio quality

Using the StableSound® feature

You can adjust the audio quality by adjusting the bass, treble,
and balance.

The StableSound® feature limits the highest volume level to
prevent extreme changes in volume when the signal source
changes (for example, to prevent the sudden increase in volume
that often happens when a TV program switches to a
commercial).
To turn on the StableSound® feature:
1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.
2. Highlight Audio Settings and press ENTER.

To adjust the audio quality:
1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.
2. Highlight Audio Settings and press ENTER.

Audio
Audio Settings
Advanced Audio Settings
Audio Setup

Audio
Audio Settings
Advanced Audio Settings
Audio Setup
Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

3. Press z or y to highlight the item you want to adjust
(Bass, Treble, or Balance).
Audio Settings
Bass

50

Treble

50

Balance

0

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

3. In the StableSound field, select On.
Audio Settings

StableSound

Off
Reset

Done

Bass

50

Treble

50

Balance

0

StableSound

4. Press x or • to adjust the level.

Off
Reset

• x makes the bass or treble weaker or increases the balance
in the left channel (depending on the item selected).
• • makes the bass or treble stronger or increases the balance
in the right channel (depending on the item selected).
5. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
ENTER. To reset the settings to the factory defaults,
highlight Reset and press ENTER.

Done

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
ENTER. To reset the settings to the factory defaults,
highlight Reset and press ENTER.
Note: The RESET function returns your audio adjustments to
the following factory settings:

Bass ............. center (50)
Treble .......... center (50)
Balance ........ center (0)
StableSound ... Off
To turn off the StableSound feature:
Select Off in step 3 above.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_084-093_4250HPX95

91
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:33 AM

91

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Adjusting the audio (continued)
Using the SRS WOW™ surround sound
feature

Using the Dolby Virtual with SRS
TruSurround sound feature

WOW™ is a special combination of SRS Labs audio
technologies (SRS 3D, FOCUS, and TruBass) that creates a
thrilling surround sound experience with deep, rich bass from
stereo sound sources. Your TV’s audio will sound fuller, richer,
and wider.

The Dolby® Virtual surround sound feature allows you to enjoy
virtual surround sound from the TV’s speakers.
• If you connect a device (a game console, a DVD player or
a DTV receiver, etc.) with analog audio output to the
standard (analog) audio terminals on the TV, and the input
source is encoded with Dolby Surround
sound or
Dolby Digital
sound, the Dolby Virtual feature

To adjust the WOW™ settings:
1. Put the TV in STEREO mode (see “Selecting stereo/SAP
broadcasts” on page 90).
2. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.
3. Highlight Advanced Audio Settings and press ENTER.

Audio

operates as Virtual Dolby Surround
(VDS). VDS
simulates Dolby Surround sound from the TV’s speakers.
To turn on the Dolby Virtual surround sound feature:
1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.
2. Highlight Advanced Audio Settings and press ENTER.

Audio Settings
Advanced Audio Settings
Audio Setup

Audio

4. Press z or y to highlight the WOW feature you want to
adjust, and then press x or • to adjust the item.
Off

WOW: FOCUS

Off

WOW: TruBass

Low

Dolby Virtual
TruSurround

On

Advanced Audio Settings
Audio Setup

3. Press y or z to highlight the Dolby Virtual TruSurround,
and then press x or • to select On.

Advanced Audio Settings
WOW: SRS 3D

Audio Settings

Advanced Audio Settings
WOW: SRS 3D

Reset

Done

• WOW: SRS 3D — To turn the surround sound effect On
or Off.
Note: If the broadcast is monaural, the 3D effect does not
work.

• WOW: FOCUS — To turn the vocal emphasis effect On
or Off.
• WOW: TruBass — To select the desired bass expansion
level (High, Low, or Off ).
5. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press ENTER.

Off

WOW: TruBass

Low

Dolby Virtual
TruSurround

On
Reset

To turn off the Dolby Virtual surround sound feature:
Select Off in step 3 above.
Note:
• The Dolby Virtual TruSurround and WOW SRS 3D features cannot
be on at the same time. If you set one to On, the other will
automatically be set to Off.
• The Dolby Virtual TruSurround feature is enabled only when
receiving digital broadcasts.

• WOW, TruSurround, SRS and
symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.
WOW technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_084-093_4250HPX95

92
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Done

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press ENTER.

______________

92

Off

WOW: FOCUS

7/12/05, 9:34 AM

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Adjusting the audio (continued)
Turning off the built-in speakers
Use this feature to turn off the TV speakers when you connect
an audio system to your TV (see “Connecting a digital audio
system” and “Connecting an analog audio system” on page 23).
To turn off the built-in speakers:
1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.
2. Highlight Audio Setup and press ENTER.

Selecting the optical audio output
format
Use this feature to select the optical audio output format when
you connect a Dolby Digital decoder or other digital audio
system to the Optical Audio Out terminal on the TV (see
“Connecting a digital audio system” on page 23).
To select the optical audio output format:
1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.
2. Highlight Audio Setup and press ENTER.

Audio
Audio Settings
Advanced Audio Settings

Audio

Audio Setup

Audio Settings
Advanced Audio Settings
Audio Setup

3. In the Speakers field, select Off.

3. In the Optical Output Format field, select either Dolby
Digital or PCM, depending on your device.

Audio Setup
MTS

Stereo

Language

English

Speakers

On

Optical Output Format

Audio Setup

Dolby Digital

Reset

Done

MTS

Stereo

Language

English

Speakers

On

Optical Output Format

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press ENTER.
To turn on the built-in speakers:
Select On in step 3 above.

Dolby Digital

Reset

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press ENTER.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_084-093_4250HPX95

93
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Done

7/12/05, 9:35 AM

93

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Setting the On/Off Timer

Setting the sleep timer

You can use the On/Off Timer to turn the TV on and off at a
preset time on a recurring basis.

You can set the sleep timer to turn off the TV after a set length
of time (maximum of 3 hours). The sleep timer turns off the TV
one time only, as opposed to the On/Off Timer, which turns off
the TV on a recurring basis.

Note: You must first set the time (see page 55).

To set the On/Off Timer:
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
2. Highlight On/Off Timer and press ENTER.

Setup
Installation

To set the sleep timer:
Press SLEEP on the remote control to set the length of time until
the TV turns off. Repeatedly press SLEEP to increase the time in
10-minute increments or press y or z to increase or decrease the
time in 10-minute increments, to a maximum of 3 hours and 00
minutes.

Sleep Timer

To cancel the sleep timer:
Press SLEEP until it is set to 0.

On/Off Timer
PC Settings
Auto

HDMI 1 Audio
HDMI 2 Audio

Auto

Slide Show Interval

2 Sec

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

SLEEP

3. In the Day field, press x or • to select the recurrence
(Weekends, Weekdays, Every Day, etc).

To set the sleep timer using the on-screen menus:
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
2. Highlight Sleep Timer and press ENTER.

On/Off Timer
Turn TV ON:
Weekends

Day
Time (HH:MM)

0 9 : 0 0

Reset

AM

30 Minutes

TV ON Duration:
Cancel

Done
Setup

4. Press z to highlight the Time field, and then use the
Number buttons to enter the time you want the TV to turn
on.
5. When the AM/PM field is highlighted, press • to select
AM or PM.
6. Press z to highlight the TV ON Duration field, and then
press x or • to select the length of time until the TV turns
off.

Installation
Sleep Timer
On/Off Timer
PC Settings
HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

HDMI 2 Audio

Auto

Slide Show Interval

2 Sec

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

3. Press the Number buttons to enter the length of time in
10-minute increments.

7. Highlight Done and press ENTER.

Sleep Timer

8. Turn off the TV. The TV will turn on automatically on the
day(s) and at the time you set. The TV will then turn off
automatically after the length of time you set in the TV
ON Duration field.

Enter total minutes until the TV
turns off automatically (Maximum
180 minutes)

Note:
• When a power failure occurs, the On/Off Timer settings may
be cleared.
• To display the On Timer setting, press RECALL.

To turn off the On/Off Timer:
Select Not Set in step 3 above.
On/Off Timer
Turn TV ON:
Not Set

Day

Reset

Cancel

1 2 0

Done

Cancel

4. Highlight Done and press ENTER.
Note:
• When a power failure occurs, the sleep timer setting may be cleared.
• To display the amount of time left on the sleep timer, press RECALL.

To display the remaining sleep time:
Press SLEEP.
Sleep Timer
Note: A message will display
on-screen when there is one
minute remaining on the sleep
timer.

Done

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

94
#01E_094-097_4250HPX95

94
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

EXIT Exit

7/12/05, 9:36 AM

1h10m

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Using the PC setting feature

Using the Long Life feature

You can adjust the horizontal position/size, vertical position/size,
clock phase, and sampling clock. This feature will be grayed out
on the menu unless there is a PC connected to the TV (See
“Connecting a personal computer (PC)” on page 29.)

The long life settings (Picture shift, Gray level, Reverse, and
White) help to reduce the risk of phosphor burn-in of the
plasma screen.

To set the PC setting:
1. Confirm a PC is connected (see “Connecting a personal
computer (PC)” on page 29).
2. Repeatedly press INPUT to select PC input mode. (See
“Selecting the video input source to view” on page 72.)
3. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
4. Highlight PC Settings and press ENTER.

Picture Shift
With Picture Shift set to on, the picture imperceptibly moves
around the screen intermittently to reduce the risk of phosphor
burn-in of the plasma screen.
Note: To reduce the risk of phosphor burn-in, the default setting for
the Picture Shift function is On.

To activate the picture shift feature:
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
2. Highlight Long Life and press •.

Setup
Installation
Sleep Timer
On/Off Timer
PC Settings

Setup

HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

HDMI 2 Audio

Auto

Slide Show Interval

2 Sec

On/Off Timer

Picture Shift
Gray Level

PC Settings
HDMI 1 Audio

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

5. Press y or z to highlight the item you want to adjust.
6. Press x or • to make the appropriate adjustments.
0

Horizontal Width

0

Vertical Position

0

Vertical Height

0

Clock Phase

0

Sampling Clock

Reverse

HDMI 2 Audio

Auto

White

Slide Show Interval

2 Sec

AVHD Skip Time

15 min

Long Life
Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

0

Reset

Setup

Done

On/Off Timer

Picture Shift
Gray Level

PC Settings

• Horizontal Position/Vertical Position:
Adjusts picture left/right and up/down. The adjustment range
is within ±5 from center.
(The adjustable range may vary depending on the input mode.)
• Horizontal Width/Vertical Hegiht:
Adjusts picture width of Horizontal and picture height of Vertical.
The adjustment range is within ±5 from center.
• Clock Phase:
This function is to reduce noise and sharpen the picture.
The adjustment range is within ±15 from center.
• Sampling Clock:
This function is to minimize periodic vertical stripes on the
screen.
The adjustment range is within ±15 from center.

HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

Reverse

HDMI 2 Audio
Slide Show Interval

Auto

White

2 Sec

AVHD Skip Time

15 min

95
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

On
1 On
Off

Long Life
Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

To deactivate the picture shift feature:
Select Off in step 4 above.
NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE EFFECTS ON
PLASMA DISPLAY
Avoid displaying stationary images on your Plasma display for
extended periods of time. Fixed (non-moving) images (including,
but not limited to, PIP/POP windows, closed captions, video game
patterns, TV station logos, stock tickers, and websites) and
special formats that do not use the entire screen, can become
permanently ingrained in the Plasma display and cause subtle,
but permanent, ghost images. This type of damage is NOT
COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY. See pages 4 and 5 for
details.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_094-097_4250HPX95

On
1

3. Press y or z to highlight the Picture Shift, and then press
•.
4. Press y or z to select On.

PC Settings
Horizontal Position

Auto

7/12/05, 9:37 AM

95

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Using the Long Life feature (continued)
Gray Level

White

The gray level feature will set the sidebar to three different levels
of darkness. Sidebars are the blanks spaces on either side of a 4:3
viewing area. Lowering the darkness of the sidebars will help
reduce screen burn in.

A white pattern is displayed on the whole screen.

To set the gray level of the sidebars:
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
2. Highlight Long Life and press •.
3. Press y or z to highlight the Gray Level, and then press •.
4. Press y or z to select your desired level of darkness.
(1–Black, 2–Dark Gray or 3–Gray).

To display the white pattern:
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
2. Highlight Long Life and press •.
3. Press y or z to highlight the White, and then press
ENTER.

Setup
On/Off Timer

Picture Shift
Gray Level

PC Settings
HDMI 1 Audio
HDMI 2 Audio
Setup
On/Off Timer

Picture Shift
Gray Level

PC Settings
HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

Reverse

HDMI 2 Audio
Slide Show Interval

Auto

White

2 Sec

AVHD Skip Time

15 min

On
1 1
2

Auto
Auto

Slide Show Interval

2 Sec

AVHD Skip Time

15 min

On
1

Reverse
White

Long Life

3

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

Long Life
Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

To return to the normal picture:
Press any button.

Note:
• The gray level feature does not affect video being viewed in
16:9 aspect ratio.
• When receiving a signal that has sidebars (e.g., 4:3 aspect
ratio video over a 1080i or 720p signal), the gray level feature
will not be applied to the sidebars.

Reverse
The picture is displayed alternately between positive image and
negative image to reduce the risk of phosphor burn-in of the
screen.
This function is effective for a still pattern image.
To activate the reverse:
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
2. Highlight Long Life and press •.
3. Press y or z to highlight the Reverse, and then press
ENTER.
NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE EFFECTS ON
PLASMA DISPLAY
Setup
On/Off Timer

Picture Shift
Gray Level

PC Settings
HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

Reverse

HDMI 2 Audio
Slide Show Interval

Auto

White

2 Sec

AVHD Skip Time

15 min

On
1

Long Life
Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

The positive image and negative image will alternate.

Avoid displaying stationary images on your Plasma display for
extended periods of time. Fixed (non-moving) images (including,
but not limited to, PIP/POP windows, closed captions, video game
patterns, TV station logos, stock tickers, and websites) and
special formats that do not use the entire screen, can become
permanently ingrained in the Plasma display and cause subtle,
but permanent, ghost images. This type of damage is NOT
COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY. See pages 4 and 5 for
details.

To return to the normal picture:
Press any button.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

96
#01E_094-097_4250HPX95

96
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:38 AM

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Displaying the Channel Banner
To display the channel banner:
Press RECALL on the remote control.
The following information will display in the channel banner
(if applicable):
• Current input (ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, etc.)
• If ANT 1 or ANT 2 is the current input, whether it is
Tuner Hold: On
Cable TV (“CABLE”) or STEREO
off-air (“TV”)
NC-17
• Channel number (if in
On Timer: Weekdays 12:00pm
Timer: 18 min.
ANT 1 or ANT 2 mode) Sleep
Game Timer: 28 min.
ANT 1
• Signal strength indicator
(bar graph in lower right Natural
5:32pm
CABLE 81-1
1080i
corner of banner; for
Sample channel banner screen
ATSC signal only)
Note: The signal strength indicator will react to fading and
increasing signals and could display longer than the normal
channel banner screen.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Time (if set)
On/Off timer settings (if set)
Remaining time on sleep timer (if set)
Remaining time on game timer (if set)
Stereo or SAP audio status
V-Chip rating status
Picture size
Tuner hold* (if applicable)

Understanding the auto power off
feature
The TV will automatically turn itself off after approximately 15
minutes if it is tuned to a vacant channel or a station that
completes its broadcast for the day. This feature functions in
ANT 1 and ANT 2 modes only.

Understanding the last mode
memory feature
If the power is cut off while you are viewing the TV, the Last
Mode Memory feature automatically turns on the TV when
the power is resupplied.
Note: You should unplug the TV’s power cord if it is possible
that you will be away from the TV for an extended period of time
after the power is restored.

*If you are recording on one tuner (for example, the digital
tuner), you will be able to change channels on the other tuner
only (the analog tuner in this example). The tuner from which
you are recording is “on hold” (i.e., locked) so your
recordings will not be affected by channel changes.

• Aspect ratio
To close the channel banner:
Press RECALL again.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_094-097_4250HPX95

97
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:38 AM

97

9

Using the Locks menu

The Locks menu includes the Enable Rating Blocking, Edit Rating Limits, Channels Block, Input Lock, Front Panel Lock, Game
Timer, and New PIN Code features. You can use these features after entering the correct PIN code.

Entering the PIN code
1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.

While the PIN code entering screen is displayed, press RECALL
four times within five seconds. The PIN code will be cleared and
you can enter a new PIN code.

Locks
Enable Rating Blocking

If you cannot remember your
PIN code

Off

Edit Rating Limits
Channels Block
Input Lock

Off

Front Panel Lock

Off

Game Timer

Off

Changing your PIN code

New PIN Code
Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

2. Press z, which displays the PIN code entry screen.
• The Lock System screen (below) appears if a PIN code has
not been stored. Press the Channel Number buttons to
enter a new four-digit code, enter the code a second time to
confirm, and press ENTER.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.
Press z to display the PIN code entering screen.
Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER.
Press z to highlight New PIN Code and press ENTER.

Lock System
Locks
Enable Rating Blocking

Please enter a 4 digit PIN code

Off

Edit Rating Limits
Channels Block

Confirm PIN code

Input Lock

Off

Front Panel Lock

Off

Game Timer

Off

New PIN Code

Done

Cancel

Navigate

• The Locks/Active screen (below) appears if the PIN code is
already stored. Press the Channel Number buttons to enter
your four-digit code and press ENTER.
Locks

CH RTN Back

5. Press the Number buttons to enter a new four-digit code.
Retype the numbers to confirm the PIN code you entered.
6. Press ENTER. The new PIN code is now active.

Please enter a 4 digit PIN code

Please enter the 4 digit PIN code

* * * *
Confirm PIN code

* * * *

* * * *

Done

Cancel

Done

If the wrong PIN code is entered, the message “Incorrect PIN
code, please try again!” appears. Highlight Retry and press
ENTER. Enter the code again and press ENTER.
When the correct PIN code is entered, the Locks menu opens.

Locks
Enable Rating Blocking

Off

Edit Rating Limits
Channels Block
Input Lock

Off

Front Panel Lock

Off

Game Timer

Off

New PIN Code
Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

98
#01E_098-101_4250HPX95

EXIT Exit

New PIN Code

Active

Cancel

Select

98
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:39 AM

Chapter 9: Using the Locks menu

Blocking TV programs and movies by rating (V-Chip)
Some TV programs and movies include signals that classify the
content of the program (violence, sex, dialog, language). The
V-Chip feature in this TV detects the signals and blocks the
programs according to the ratings you select. (See the tables at
right for rating descriptions.)

Independent rating system for broadcasters
Ratings

Description and Content themes

TV-MA

Mature Audience Only (This program is specifically designed
to be viewed by adults and therefore may be unsuitable for
children under 17.)
L) Crude or indecent language S) Explicit sexual activity
V) Graphic violence

TV-14

Parents Strongly Cautioned (This program contains some
material that many parents would find unsuitable for children
under 14 years of age.)
D) Intensely suggestive dialog L) Strong, coarse language
S) Intense sexual situations V) Intense violence

TV-PG

Parental Guidance Suggested (This program contains
material parents may find unsuitable for younger children.)
D) Some suggestive dialog L) Infrequent coarse language
S) Some sexual situations V) Moderate violence

Note: Rating blocking is a function of the V-Chip feature in this
TV, which supports the U.S. V-Chip system only.

To block and unblock TV programs and movies:
1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.
2. Press z to displays the PIN code entering screen.
3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER.
4. Press z to highlight Enable Rating Blocking.
5. Press • and then z to select On, and then press ENTER.

TV-G

General Audience (Most parents would find this program
suitable for all ages.)

Locks
Enable Rating Blocking

Off

Off

Edit Rating Limits

TV-Y7, Directed to Older Children (This program is designed
TV-Y7FV for children age 7 and above. Note: Programs in which
fantasy violence may be more intense or more combative
than other programs in this category are designated Y7FV.)

On

Channels Block
Input Lock

Off

Front Panel Lock

Off

Game Timer

Off

New PIN Code

TV-Y
Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

All Children (This program is designed to be appropriate for
all children.)

EXIT Exit

6. Press z to highlight Edit Rating Limits and press ENTER.
Independent rating system for movies
Locks
Enable Rating Blocking

Rating

Off

Description and content themes

Edit Rating Limits

X

Channels Block
Input Lock

Off

Front Panel Lock

Off

Game Timer

Off

NC-17
R

New PIN Code
Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

Edit Rating Limits
S

V

Movies
G

TV-Y7

PG

TV-G

PG-13

TV-PG

R

TV-14

NC-17

TV-MA

X

"None" Rated or "No Rating"

Children
Youth

Not intended for anyone 17 and under
Restricted (Under 17 requires accompanying parent or adult)

PG-13

The Edit Rating Limits screen (below) appears.
7. Press yzx • and then press ENTER to select the level of
blocking you prefer. A box with an “×” is a rating that will
be blocked. As you highlight a rating, a definition for the
rating appears at the bottom of the screen. See notes at
right.
8. When done selecting the ratings you want to block,
highlight Done and press ENTER.
TV (V-CHIP) FV D L
TV-Y

X-rated (For adults only)

PG
G

Parents Strongly Cautioned (Some material may be
inappropriate for children under 13)
Parental Guidance Suggested (Some material may not be
suitable for children)
General Audience (Appropriate for all ages)

Note:
• If you place an “X” in the box next to “None” Rated or “No Rating,”
programs rated “None” or “No Rating” will be blocked. However, if
the program does not provide any rating information, nothing will be
displayed in the banner and ratings blocking will not take effect.
• To display the rating of the program you are watching, press
RECALL on the remote control. If it is not rated, the word “NONE”
appears.

Cancel
Done

TV – PG

L

V

NONE

This program is designed for children age 7 and adove.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_098-101_4250HPX95

99
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:40 AM

99

Chapter 9: Using the Locks menu

Blocking channels

Unlocking programs temporarily

With the Channels Block feature, you can block specific
channels. You will not be able to tune blocked channels unless
you clear the setting first.
To block channels:
1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.
2. Press z to displays the
PIN code entering screen.
Locks
3. Enter your four-digit PIN
Enable Rating Blocking
Off
code and press ENTER
Edit Rating Limits
Channels Block
(see page 97 for details).
Input Lock
Off
Front Panel Lock
Off
4. Press z to highlight
Game Timer
Off
Channels Block and
New PIN Code
then press ENTER.
5. Using the yz x •
buttons, select the input for which you want to change the
rating limits (ANT1, ANT2, or Cable Box, if connected)
and press ENTER.
A list of the channels available for that input will be displayed
along with the call letters for each channel, if available.
6. Press yz to highlight
Channels Block
ANT 1
the channel you want to
1
ANT 1
2
ANT 2
block, then press
3
Cable Box
ENTER, which puts an
4
“×” in the box next to
5
6
that channel.
7
Allow All
7. Repeat step 6 for other
8
Block All
channels you want to block.
9
Cancel
10
Done
8. Highlight Done and
press ENTER.

If you try to watch a TV program that exceeds the rating limits
you set, the TV enters program lock mode. You can either
unlock the program temporarily or select a non-locked program
to watch.

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

To unblock individual channels:
In step 6 above, press yz to highlight the channel you want to
unblock, and then press ENTER to remove the “×” from the
box, and highlight Done, and then press ENTER.
To block all channels at once:
Highlight Block All in step 6 above, and then highlight Done,
and press ENTER.
To unblock all locked channels at once:
Highlight Allow All in step 6 above , and then highlight Done,
and press ENTER.
Note: Channel blocking may
not take effect if you have a
cable box connected and use
the cable box controls to
change channels.

Channels Block

ANT 1

1

ANT 1

2

ANT 2

3

Cable Box

4
5
6
7

Allow All

8

Block All

9

Cancel

10

Done

To temporarily unlock the program:
1. Press MUTE.
2. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER. If the
correct code is entered,
Locks
Active
the program lock mode
Enter PIN code to temporaily unis released and the
block.
normal picture appears.
* * * *
All locking is disabled
Done
Cancel
until the TV is turned
off, and will be enabled
when the TV is turned on again.

Locking video inputs
You can use the Input Lock feature to lock the video input
sources (VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3, ColorStream HD-1,
ColorStream HD-2, HDMI 1/HDMI 2, PC) and channels 3
and 4. You will not be able to view the input sources or channels
until you turn off the input lock.
To lock the video inputs:
1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.
2. Press z to display the PIN code entering screen.
3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER.
4. Press z to highlight Input Lock and press •.
5. Press y or z to select the level of video input locking you
prefer, as described
below:
Locks
Video: Locks VIDEO 1,
Enable Rating Blocking
Off
Off
Edit Rating Limits
Video
VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3,
Channels Block
Video +
Input
Lock
Off
ColorStream HD1/
Front Panel Lock
Off
HD2, HDMI 1/
Game Timer
Off
New PIN Code
HDMI 2 and PC.
Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

Video+: Locks VIDEO
1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3, ColorStream HD1/HD2, HDMI
1/HDMI 2, PC, and channels 3 and 4. Select Video+ if
you use the antenna terminal to play a video tape.
Note: Make sure the POP is not on channel 3 or 4.

Off: Unlocks all video input sources.
6. Press ENTER.
Note: When a CableCARD™ is inserted, Video+ will behave the same as
Video lock.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

100
#01E_098-101_4250HPX95

100
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:41 AM

Chapter 9: Using the Locks menu

Using the GameTimer™

Using the panel lock feature

You can use the GameTimer to set a time limit for playing a
video game (30–120 minutes). When the GameTimer is
activated, the TV enters VIDEO LOCK mode and locks out
the input source for the video game device.

You can lock the side panel buttons to prevent your settings
from being changed accidentally (by children, for example).
When the panel lock is On, none of the controls on the TV side
panel will operate except POWER.

To set the GameTimer™:
1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.
2. Press z to display the PIN code entering screen.
3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER.
4. Press z to highlight Game Timer and press •.
5. Press y or z to select the length of time until the Video
Lock is activated (30, 60, 90, or 120 minutes) and press
ENTER.

To lock the side panel:
1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.
2. Press z to display the PIN code entering screen.
3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER.
4. Press z to highlight Front Panel Lock.
5. Press • to highlight On and press ENTER. When the side
panel is locked and a button on the side panel except
POWER button is pressed, the message “Not Available”
appears.

Locks
Enable Rating Blocking

Off

Off

Locks

Edit Rating Limits

30 min

Channels Block

60 min

Enable Rating Blocking

Off

90 min

Edit Rating Limits

Front Panel Lock

Off

120 min

Game Timer

Off

Input Lock

Select

CH RTN Back

Off
On

Channels Block

New PIN Code
Navigate

Off

Input Lock

Off

Front Panel Lock

Off

Game Timer

Off

New PIN Code

EXIT Exit

Navigate

To cancel the GameTimer™:
Select Off in step 5 above.
To deactivate the video lock once the GameTimer has
activated it:
Set the Video Lock to Off (see “Locking video inputs” on page
100).

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

To unlock the side panel:
Highlight Off in step 5 above, or press and hold the
VOLUME x button on the TV side panel for about 10
seconds until the volume icon appears on-screen.
TV side panel

Note:
• A message will appear on-screen when 10 minutes, 3
minutes, and 1 minute remain on the GameTimer.
• If the TV loses power with time remaining on the GameTimer,
when power is restored the TV will enter VIDEO LOCK mode
(as if the GameTimer had expired) and you will have to
deactivate the video lock (as described above).

VOLUME x

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_098-101_4250HPX95

101
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:41 AM

101

10

Using the memory card JPEG picture viewer/MP3
audio player

You can use the memory card slots on the TV side panel to view
compatible JPEG files or play compatible MP3 files stored on a
memory card (see “Memory card specifications” below and at
right). You can display JPEG files in thumbnail mode or view
them as a slide show.
Note:
• Never remove the memory card or turn off the TV while
using the memory card. Doing so may result in loss of data and/
or damage to the memory card and/or TV. SUCH DAMAGE IS NOT
COVERED BY YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY.
• It is recommended that you back up your memory card data. Toshiba
is not liable for any damage caused by the use of any memory card
with this TV. Toshiba will not compensate for any lost data or
recording(s) caused by the use of such cards.
• For instructions on using your digital camera, refer to the owner’s
manual for your camera.
• For instructions on using your memory card, refer to the owner’s
manual for your memory card.
• Failure to take proper care of a memory card may prevent display of
pictures or playback of MP3 files from the card or result in damage to
the memory card and/or TV. SUCH DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED BY
YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY. See “Memory card care and
handling” on page 105.
• The technical criteria set out in this owner’s manual are meant as a
guide only.
• Please be advised that you must obtain permission from the
applicable copyright owners to download copyrighted content,
including music files, in any format, including the MP3 format, prior to
the downloading thereof. Toshiba has no right to grant and does not
grant permission to download any copyrighted content.

Memory card specifications

■ Maximum memory card capacity: 512 MB.
■ Maximum displayable JPEG image size: 8 MB.
• JPEG files larger than 8 MB will not display.
■ Maximum MP3 file size:
• MP3 files have no size limit other than the maximum capacity
of the memory card.
■ Maximum displayable JPEG image resolution: 6000x4000

pixels.
■ Maximum number of files per directory: 370.
• All files over the 370th in a single directory will not display/play.
• Files in directories more than 10 levels down from the top level
directory will not display/play.
■ Maximum number of files per memory card: JPEG = 1,000;

MP3 = 200.
• All JPEG files over the 1,000th on a single memory card will not
display.
• All MP3 files over the 200th on a single memory card will not play.
■ File name restrictions:
• File names cannot contain the following characters: \ / : ? “ < > | .
• File names must contain US-ASCII characters only.
• The maximum file name length is 255 characters.
• The memory card reader recognizes only “.mp3” and “.jpg”
file extensions.
• The MP3 player supports only ISO-8859-1 (US-ASCII/Western
European) character sets for MP3 meta-data (e.g, artist name,
album name, song title, etc.)
■ JPEG picture viewer:
• The picture viewer supports JPEG format images only.
• The files on your memory card must be in a file and directory
format compatible with the TV or they will not display on the TV.

■ Supported memory card types:

–
Memory Card (ver. 1.0)
– MMC (MultiMediaCard™)
– Memory Stick™ (Pro)
– xD-Picture Card™ (16MB-512MB)
– CompactFlash® memory card (Type1)
Note: The picture viewer and audio player support FAT16 formatted
cards only. Other memory cord formats (including but not limited to
FAT32 or NTFS) are not supported.

• Images processed and/or edited on a personal computer (PC)
may not display properly or at all. Some digital cameras may store
images in a format that is not compatible with the TV.
■ MP3 audio player:
• The audio player supports MP3 format files only.
• The files on your memory card must be in a file and directory
format compatible with the TV or they will not play.

______________

• Files processed and/or edited on a personal computer (PC) may
not play properly or at all. Some MP3 files may be in a format that
is not compatible with the TV.

•

• MP3 files must have the following format:

is a trademark.

• MMC and MultiMediaCard are trademarks of Infineon Technologies AG
and licensed to MMCA (MultiMediaCard Association).
• Memory Stick is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
• xD-Picture Card is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.
• Toshiba is an authorized licensee of the CompactFlash® and CF logo®
registered trademarks.

- MPEG1 (ISO/IEC 11172-3) Layer3.
- Sampling frequency—MPEG1: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz.
- Bitrate—MPEG1: 32–320 kbps.
- Channels—Stereo, Joint stereo, Dual channel, Single channel.
- ID3 Ver. 1, Ver. 2.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

102
#01E_102-105_4250HPX95

102
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:42 AM

Chapter 10: Using the memory card JPEG picture viewer/MP3 audio player

Using the JPEG picture viewer
Note: If you stored both JPEG and MP3 files on the same
memory card, the JPEG picture viewer will start automatically
when you insert the memory card in the TV. To start the audio
player, you must first press EXIT to close the picture viewer and
then start the audio player while the memory card is still
inserted. See “To start the MP3 audio player when a memory
card is already inserted,” on page 105. You cannot use the
picture viewer and audio player at the same time.

2. In a few seconds, the images automatically display onscreen, with one as a large picture and six in thumbnail
format.
Picture Viewer
1 of 6
May 28 04
2 of 6
Jan 8 04
3 of 6
Jan 18 04
4 of 6
May 12 04
5 of 6

To view digital photos on your TV:
1. Insert a memory card into the appropriate memory card
slot on the side of your TV.
Note:
• Never insert more than one memory card at time.
• Be sure to insert the card correctly—label side facing left and
the end with the notched corner (if applicable) inserted into the
memory card slot.
• When a CompactFlash memory card is inserted correctly, the
ejector button pops out (see illustration below).

Sep 18 03
6 of 6
Oct 10 10

Rotate

Next

Slide Show

EXIT Exit

3. Press x to rotate the large picture 90° counterclockwise.
Picture Viewer
1 of 6
May 28 04
2 of 6
Jan 8 04
3 of 6
Jan 18 04
4 of 6
May 12 04
5 of 6
Sep 18 03
6 of 6
Oct 10 10

Rotate

Next

Slide Show

EXIT Exit

4. Press • to rotate the large picture 90° clockwise.
TV side panel

Picture Viewer
1 of 6

{

Memory card slots

May 28 04
2 of 6
Jan 8 04
3 of 6
Jan 18 04
4 of 6
May 12 04
5 of 6
Sep 18 03
6 of 6
Oct 10 10

Rotate

Next

Slide Show

EXIT Exit

5. Press y or z to select another picture as the large picture.
➔

➔

6. Press ENTER to view your pictures in a slide show.

➔

➔

CompactFlash
ejector button

or
or
xD-Picture Card

MMC
(MultiMediaCard)

or

™

Secure Digital

SD
(Secure Digital)
memory card

Memory Stick

CompactFlash
memory card

During the slide show:
• To stop on an image during the slide show, press ENTER.
To resume the slide show, press ENTER again.
• To rotate the picture, press x or •, and then press ENTER.
• To select another image, press y or z, and then press
ENTER.
• To stop the slide show and return to the picture viewer,
press CH RTN.
• To stop the slide show and return to the regular TV screen,
press EXIT.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_102-105_4250HPX95

103
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:43 AM

103

Chapter 10: Using the memory card JPEG picture viewer/MP3 audio player

Using the JPEG picture viewer (continued)
To set the slide show interval:
Note: The picture viewer must be closed before you can set the
slide show interval.

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
2. Highlight Slide Show Interval and press ENTER. Select the
interval from the menu sidebar (2, 5, 10, 15, or 20
seconds).

2 sec

Sleep Timer

5 sec

On/Off Timer

10 sec

PC Settings

15 sec

HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

HDMI 2 Audio

Auto

Slide Show Interval
Navigate

Select

20 sec

2 Sec
CH RTN Back

Note:
• If you stored both JPEG and MP3 files on the same memory card, the
JPEG picture viewer will start automatically when you insert the
memory card in the TV. To start the audio player, you must first press
EXIT to close the picture viewer and then start the audio player while
the memory card is still inserted. See “To start the MP3 audio player
when a memory card is already inserted,” next page. You cannot
use the picture viewer and audio player at the same time.
• Make all the desired adjustments to the surround, bass, treble, and
balance before starting the MP3 audio player.
• Please be advised that you must obtain permission from the
applicable copyright owners to download copyrighted content,
including music files, in any format, including the MP3 format, prior to
the downloading thereof. Toshiba has no right to grant and does not
grant permission to download any copyrighted content.

Setup
Installation

Using the MP3 audio player

EXIT Exit

To close the picture viewer:
Press EXIT to close the picture viewer and return to the regular
TV screen.
To restart the picture viewer while the memory card is still
inserted:
1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu.
2. Highlight Picture Viewer and press ENTER.

To start the MP3 audio player when a memory card is not
already inserted:
1. Insert a memory card into the appropriate memory card
slot on the side of your TV (see page 102 for details).
Note:
• Never insert more than one memory card at a time.
• Be sure to insert the card correctly—label side facing left and
the end with the notched corner (if applicable) inserted into the
memory card slot.
• When a CompactFlash memory card is inserted correctly, the
ejector button pops out (see page 102).

2. If you have only MP3 files on the memory card, the audio
player will launch within a few seconds after being inserted
and begin playing the first MP3 file on the memory card.

Applications
TV Guide On Screen
Audio Player
Picture Viewer
Digital CC/Audio Selector
CableCARD

Audio Player
Title

Artist

Ser No.1 in D, Op.11...

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

SCO/Sir Charles...

3. Follow the steps under “To view digital photos on your
TV” on the previous page.
To close the picture viewer and remove the memory card:
1. Press EXIT to close the picture viewer and return to the
regular TV screen.
NOTE: ALWAYS CLOSE THE PICTURE
VIEWER BEFORE REMOVING THE
MEMORY CARD.
If you remove the memory card while viewing pictures, the card
and/or saved data may be damaged. THIS TYPE OF DAMAGE
IS NOT COVERED UNDER YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY.

Rapsodie Espagnole:...

Jesus Lopez-Cobo...

III. Sanctus: Sanctu...

Boston Baroque/M...

Piano Sonata, K. 545...

A-M Classical

Pathétique Sonata, m...

A-M Classical

Chopin Prelude No. ...

Andrys

Piano Sonata, K. 545...

A-M Classical

Navigate

104
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

A-M Classical

Select

EXIT Exit

3. Press yz x • to navigate to the rewind, pause, fast
forward, skip backward, skip forward, volume, and mute
buttons, or to select another MP3, and then press ENTER.
To use the mute function
Press yz x • to select the
(mute) button, and then press
ENTER. See page 90 for details on muting the sound.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_102-105_4250HPX95

Moolight Sonata, movement

Moolight Sonata, mo... A-M Classical

2. For a CompactFlash memory card, press the ejector button
and then pull the card straight out from the TV. For all
other memory cards, pull the card straight out from the TV.

104

Vol

Requiem, Op. 5: IV. R... Robert Shaw/Atla...

EXIT Exit

7/12/05, 9:44 AM

Chapter 10: Using the memory card JPEG picture viewer/MP3 audio player

Using the MP3 audio player (continued)
To start the MP3 audio player when a memory card is
already inserted:
1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu.
2. Highlight Audio Player and press ENTER.
3. Press yz x • to
navigate to the rewind,
pause, fast forward, skip
backward, skip forward,
volume, and mute
buttons, and then press
ENTER.

Memory card care and handling
NOTE: ALWAYS CLOSE THE AUDIO
PLAYER BEFORE REMOVING THE
MEMORY CARD.
If you remove the memory card while playing MP3 files, the card
and/or saved data may be damaged. THIS TYPE OF DAMAGE
IS NOT COVERED UNDER YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY.

Applications
TV Guide On Screen

• Use index labels made exclusively for your specific brand of
memory card. Do not use commercially sold labels, which
can cause a malfunction when the card is inserted or
ejected.

Audio Player
Picture Viewer
Digital CC/Audio Selector
CableCARD

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

Note: After 30 seconds a
screen saver will appear. To access the screen saver immediately,
press any button on the remote control.

To close the MP3 audio player:
Press EXIT to close the audio player and return to the regular
TV screen.
To close the MP3 audio player and remove the memory card:
1. Press EXIT to close the audio player and return to the
regular TV screen.
2. For a CompactFlash memory card, press the ejector button
and then pull the card straight out from the TV. For all
other memory cards, pull the card straight out from the TV.

• If the image does not appear correctly, or the audio file does
not play correctly, clean the metallic area of the memory
card using a soft, dry, lint-free, anti-static cloth and then
reinsert the card.
• Prevent contact of the metallic area on the memory card
from coming in contact with dust, dirt, or other foreign
particles. Do not touch the metallic area of the memory
card with your hands or otherwise handle it with anything
other than a soft, dry, lint-free, anti-static cloth.
Note: Toshiba is not liable for any damage caused by the use
of any memory card with this TV. Toshiba will not compensate
for any lost data or recordings caused by the use of such
cards.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_102-105_4250HPX95

105
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:44 AM

105

11

Connecting your TV to the Network

You can network the TV with your home Internet service to remotely schedule recordings and reminders by sending an email to the TV.
To use this feature, you must have Internet e-mail service in your home and two separate e-mail addresses (your personal e-mail and a
second email address for use solely by the TV). Contact your ISP (Internet Service Provider) for these services.

Setting up the Network connection

5. When finished, highlight Done and press ENTER.
Basic Network Setup
Please enter your Network Address Information

Setting up the Network address
The following explains how to manually input settings such as
the IP address, etc.
Note:
• You must first set up THINC™ to connect to a home network,
see page 30.
• This feature is only for remotely scheduling recordings and
reminders. You will not be able to access the Internet through
the TV.

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. The Network
menu will appear.

IP Address

xxx

xxx

xxx

xxx

Subnet Mask

xxx

xxx

xxx

xxx

Gateway(Router)

xxx
xxx

xxx
xxx

xxx
xxx

xxx
xxx

DNS(Domain Name Saver)
Cancel

Done

Network address set up is finished, and the Network menu
returns.
To obtain the Network address automatically:
1. Follow steps 1-2 above.
2. Highlight Basic Network Setup, and press ENTER.
Basic Network Setup
Obtain network address automatically?

Yes

No

3. Highlight Yes, and then press ENTER.

Network
Basic Network Setup

Basic Network Setup

Recording Email Setup
Home File Server Setup

Please waite...

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

3. Highlight Basic Network Setup, and press ENTER. The
screen to confirm automatically obtaining the Network
address appears. Highlight No, and then press ENTER.
Basic Network Setup
Obtain network address automatically?

Yes

The Completion screen will appear after the address is assigned
from the DHCP server. Press ENTER to return to the Network
menu.
If obtaining the address from the DHCP server fails, the Error
screen will appear. Make sure the the cable is connected to the
RJ-45 port terminal securely, and highlight Yes, press ENTER,
and set it up again.

No
Error.Unable to obtain network address information.Please
re-check network connections and DHCP server status.

Note: If the network address is automatically obtained, see
“To obtain the Network address automatically” at right.

Try Again?

Yes

No

4. Basic Network Setup menu appears.
To reset the Network address:
1. Follow steps 1-2 of “Setting up the Network address”.
2. Highlight Basic Network Setup, and press ENTER. The
screen to confirm resetting appears. Highlight Yes and press
ENTER.

Basic Network Setup
Please enter your Network Address Information
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway(Router)
DNS(Domain Name Saver)
Cancel

Done

Use yzx • or the number buttons to enter your network
address (IP address, Subnet Mask, Gateway (Router), and
DNS) provided by the internet service provider.

Basic Network Setup
Your Basic Network Setup is complete. Would you like to start over?

Yes

No

Next, follow step 4 on “Setting up the Network address”.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

106
#01E_106-111_4250HPX95

106
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

05.7.12, 11:13

Chapter 11: Connecting your TV to the Network

Set up the Email account
To set up the Email account for timer recording by Email, set
the Recording Email setup screen as follows.
Note:
• If you set up the TV address with the same name as another
address, large Emails or Email with attached files will be deleted
automatically. You must have an Email address for sole use by the
TV.

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. The Network
menu appears.

Network
Basic Network Setup
Recording Email Setup
Home File Server Setup

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

3. Highlight Recording Email Setup, and press ENTER. The
Recording Email Setup menu appears.
Recording Email Setup
Please enter your Email Setup Information.
TV-Guide Email

On
On

ID Required

XXXXXXXXXXXX

ID
Email Address

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

Account

XXXXX

Password

*****

Incoming Mail Server

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

Outgoing Mail Server

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

Email Authorization

On
Enter YOUR email here

Authorized Email
Test

• Email address:
Press ENTER to display the keyboard on the screen, and
then enter your Email address for your TV.
• Account:
Press ENTER to display the keyboard on the screen, and
then enter your Email account for your TV.
• Password:
Press ENTER to display the keyboard on the screen, and
then enter your Email password for your TV.
• Incoming Mail Server (POP3):
Press ENTER to display the keyboard on the screen, and
then enter your Incoming mail server name of your TV
Email.
• Outgoing Mail Server (SMTP):
Press ENTER to display the keyboard on the screen, and
then enter your Outgoing mail server name of your TV
Email.
• Email Authorization:
Select On or Off. When you select ON, the TV accepts
timer recordings only from an address selected in
“Authorized Email” below. When you select Off, the TV
accepts timer recordings from multiple addresses.
• Authorized Email:
Press ENTER to display the keyboard on the screen, and
then enter your desired address. the TV accepts timer
recordings only from the desired address. You can not input
this field when you set the Email Authorization to Off.

cancel

Done

4. Set up the contents below using yzx • and ENTER;
• TV-Guide Email:
Select On or Off. When you select On, it is available to timer
record by Email through the TV-Guide Email function.
• ID required:
Select On or Off.
• ID:
An ID number is required to add or cancel the timer
recording. Press ENTER, and then the keyboard will
appear on the screen.
Press yzx • to select a Required ID
character for the first
_
space and then press
ENTER. Repeat to enter
the rest of the characters.

Please enter a mail verification ID containing 6 or more characters

1
q

2
w

a

3
e

s

z

4
r

d

x

5
t

f

c

6
y

g

v

7
u

h

b

n m

Shift

Enter

8
i

j

9
o

k

0
p

l

,

[

;

.

=
]

When finished, test the setting to make sure the account is set
up accurately.
Highlight Test and press ENTER
If the account is set up accurately, highlight “Done” and press
ENTER.
Note:
• If you set the Email Authorization to Off, the TV will accept timer
recordings from each address. For multiple users, set to Off so that
each user can use the timer recording function by Email. Note that if
your TV address becomes known to outside parties, you may receive
junk Email, so please be careful with your mail address.
• It is better to set up your ID using a different address from the POP
address. If the ID address is the same as the POP address, your POP
address may become known to outside parties.

'

/

BS

Clear

Cancel

Note:
Enter a mail verification ID
containing 6 or more characters.
After you have entered your ID number, then highlight Enter
and press ENTER.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_106-111_4250HPX95

107
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

05.7.12, 11:13

107

Chapter 11: Connecting your TV to the Network

Timer recording via Email
You can timer record or delete the programs you set by sending
an Email to the TV. With the Email Recording feature, the
following commands are available: Add, Delete, Get, or Help.
When you send an Email to the TV, make sure to follow the
form below.
Note:
• Text or Rich Text (HTML style) is accepted.
• Emails over 16K are automatically deleted.
• Emails with attached files are automatically deleted.

■ Delete:

The DELETE command removes an already scheduled
reminder or recording. The INPUT, CHANNEL, DATE,
TIME, DURATION, and TYPE must be specified. Sample
DELETE command email contents (deleting a Recording):
Subject: delete
————
Id myID1234 Delete ANTENNA-1 102-1 6/10/2005
19:00 1:00 RECORD
■ Get:

The GET command retrieves a list of currently scheduled
reminders or recordings. Sample GET command email contents:
Subject: get
————
get

■ Add:

The ADD command schedules a new recording or reminder.
The INPUT, CHANNEL, DATE, TIME, and DURATION
must be specified. Sample ADD command email contents
(adding a Reminder):
Subject: add
————
id myID1234
command add
input ant-1
chan 102-1
date 06/10/2005
time 7 pm
duration 1hr
record

■ Help:

The HELP command retrieves information on the syntax and
purpose of commands and fields. Sample HELP command
email contents:
Subject: help
————
help
After receiving and processing the email, the TV will reply to the
email. The reply email contains one of the following messages:
• ADD SUCCESS
• DELETE SUCCESS
• GET SUCCESS
• HELP SUCCESS

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

108
#01E_106-111_4250HPX95

108
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

05.7.12, 11:13

Chapter 11: Connecting your TV to the Network

Using the audio player/picture viewer via network
You can enjoy the MP3 files or JPEG files which are stored on a PC, using only the TV remote via network. First, set up the folders
which for storing MP3 files or JPEG files to share with the PC, then set up the Home File Server on the TV.
■ Picture viewer

• Picture viewer supports JPG or JPEG format images (96-128
kbps) only.
• Maximum number of files: 1,000 files
• Maximum file size: 8,192,000 Bytes per file
• Maximum directory folder depth is 10
• Compatible with Windows NetBios

3. In the folder properties
dialog, select “Share this
folder”.

■ Audio Player

•
•
•
•
•

Audio Player supports MP3 format files (96-128 kbps) only.
Maximum numbers of files: 200 files
Maximum file size: 51,200,000 Bytes per file
Maximum directory folder depth is 10
Compatible with Windows NetBios

Procedure for setting up mp3 sharing
on Windows XP machine running
service pack 2

4. To allow anonymous logins
(logins without passwords),
select the “Security” tab.

1. On the PC hosting the folders and files to be shared, right
click the folder.
2. From the pop-up menu select “Sharing and Security…”

5. Click on “Add…”

6. In the “Enter the object names to select” box, type the user
name and click on “Check Names”.
7. Ensure that the user name shows up as a recognized type.
Click “OK”.

8. Click on OK all the way through.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_106-111_4250HPX95

109
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

05.7.12, 11:13

109

Chapter 11: Connecting your TV to the Network

Using the audio player/picture viewer via network (continued)
Procedure for Windows XP with
service pack 1
1. On the PC hosting the folders and files to be shared, right
click the folder.
2. From the pop-up menu select “Sharing and Security…”

How do I check if my machine is
running service pack 1 or 2?
1.
2.
3.
4.

Click “Start” button
Click “Settings | Control Panel”.
In the Control Panel, double-click on “System”.
Select the “General” tab to check what operating system
and service pack is currently being used.

3. In the folder properties dialog box, select “Share this folder
on the network”.

4. Click “OK”.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

110
#01E_106-111_4250HPX95

110
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:47 AM

Chapter 11: Connecting your TV to the Network

Using the audio player/picture viewer via network (continued)
Set up the Home File server
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. The Network
menu will appear.

To start the Picture viewer/Audio
player
1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu.
2. Highlight Picture Viewer or Audio Player, and press
ENTER.

Network
Basic Network Setup
Recording Email Setup

Applications

Home File Server Setup

TV Guide On Screen
Audio Player
Picture Viewer
Digital CC/Audio Selector
Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

CableCARD

3. Highlight Home File server setup, and press ENTER.
The Home File Server Setup menu will appear.
Home File Server Setup

Navigate

Select

CH RTN Back

EXIT Exit

3. The picture viewer or audio player will launch.

Please Wait...

Please enter your Home File Server Setup information.
Home Server Name

––
––

User Name
Password

Picture Viewer

//ABCD/JPEG

*****

1 of 6

JPEG Picture Directory

––

May 28 04

MP3 Music Directory

––

2 of 6
Jan 8 04
3 of 6

Cancel

Done

Jan 18 04
4 of 6
May 12 04

4. Press x or • to select the desired Home Server Name.

5 of 6
Sep 18 03
6 of 6
Oct 10 10

Home File Server Setup

Please Wait...

Rotate

Next

Slide Show

EXIT Exit

Please enter your Home File Server Setup information.
Home Server Name

ABCD

4. Follow the steps under “To view digital photos on your
TV” on page 103, or “Using the MP3 audio player” on
page 104.

––

User Name
Password

*****

JPEG Picture Directory

––

MP3 Music Directory

––

Cancel

Done

5. Select the User Name or Password field using y or z, and
then press ENTER to display the keyboard on the screen.
Enter the User Name or Password on this screen.
Note: To enter the Home Server Name or Password, see “Set up the
Email account” (on page 107).

6. When you highlight the JPEG Picture Directory, the shared
folder name will be displayed on the screen. Press x or • to
select your desired folder.
Home File Server Setup

Please Wait...

Please enter your Home File Server Setup information.
Home Server Name

ABCD

User Name

XYZ

Password

*****

JPEG Picture Directory

JPEG
MP3

MP3 Music Directory
Cancel

Done

7. When you highlight the MP3 Music Directory, the shared
folder will be displayed on the screen. Press x or • to select
your desired folder.
8. Highlight “Done” and press ENTER.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_106-111_4250HPX95

111
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:48 AM

111

12

Troubleshooting

General troubleshooting
Before calling a service technician, please check the following table for a possible cause of the symptom and some solutions.
Symptom

Solution

TV will not turn on

• Make sure the power cord is plugged in, and then press POWER.
• The remote control batteries may be dead. Replace the batteries or try the side panel buttons.

Picture problems

• Check the antenna/cable connections (Chapter 2).
• Press INPUT on the remote control or TV/VIDEO on the TV side panel and select a valid video input
source (page 72). If no device is connected to any of the inputs on the TV, no picture will display when
you select that particular input source. For device connection details, see Chapter 2.
• Antenna reception may be poor. Use a highly directional outdoor antenna (if applicable).
• The station may have broadcast difficulties. Try another channel.
• Adjust the picture qualities (page 84).
• If you are using a VCR, make sure the TV/VCR button on the remote control is set correctly (page 31).
• If you have two VCRs connected to your TV, do not connect the same VCR to the TV’s output and input
connections at the same time (page 21).
• Do not connect a standard video cable and an S-video cable to VIDEO-1 or VIDEO-2 on the TV back (or
VIDEO 3 on the TV side) at the same time (Chapter 2).

Noisy picture

• If you are watching a tuned analog channel (off-air broadcast or Cable TV), set the CableClear®/DNR
feature to AUTO to reduce visible interference in the TV picture (page 86).

Video Input Selection
problems

• If the Input Selection window does not appear when you press INPUT on the remote control or
TV/VIDEO on the TV side panel, press INPUT or TV/VIDEO a second time, which will change to the next
video input source and display the Input Selection window.

Cannot view external signals
or channel 3 or 4

• If you cannot view signals from external devices connected to VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3, or
ColorStream,® or from channels 3 or 4, make sure the Input Lock is set to Off (page 100).

Black box on screen

• Set the Closed Caption feature to Off (page 88).

Poor color or no color

• The station may have broadcast difficulties. Try another channel.
• Adjust the Tint and/or Color (page 84).
• When the ColorStream® signal source is active, the VIDEO OUT terminal outputs blank video. To receive
video from the VIDEO OUT signal, a standard video or S-video IN terminal must be used instead of the
ColorStream® connections.

POP problems

• The VIDEO OUT terminal will not output the POP picture (pages 21 and 81).
• If you label all of the inputs as “Hide,” the POP feature will be disabled. If you then attempt to access the
POP feature, the message “Not available” will appear on-screen (page 81).

Picture and sound are out of sync • As with all products that contain a digital display, in rare instances, when viewing certain content (e.g..
television broadcasts, video games, DVD), you may notice that the sound and picture are slightly out of
sync. This phenomenon can be caused by various factors including, without limitation, video processing
within the TV, video processing in an attached gaming system, and video processing/different
compression rates used by broadcasters in their programming. You may want to try one or more of the
following suggestions, which may help to reduce the effect of this phenomenon:
- If the TV is connected to an A/V receiver that has a programmable audio delay feature, use this feature
to help synchronize the sound to the picture.
- If you notice this phenomenon only on certain TV channels, please contact your local broadcast,
cable, or satellite provider to inform them of this issue.
Memory card
problems

•
•
•
•
•

Make sure you are using a supported or valid memory card format (page 102).
Make sure you have saved the picture files in the correct file format (page 102).
The card may be inserted improperly. Remove the card and reinsert it (page 103).
The memory card may be empty.
The memory card may be damaged.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

112
#01E_112-117_4250HPX95

112
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:48 AM

Chapter 12: Troubleshooting

General troubleshooting (continued)
Symptom

Solution

“Now Booting” message
appears on-screen

• When you turn on the TV after connecting the power cord, the message
“Now Booting…” will be displayed on-screen until the TV enters standby mode. This is normal and is not a
sign of malfunction.

Sound problems

•
•
•
•
•
•

Remote control problems

•
•
•
•

Channel tuning problems

• Make sure the remote control is set to the correct device mode (page 33).
• The channel may have been erased from the channel memory by the Channel Add/Delete feature. Add
the channel to the channel memory (page 48).
• The channel may be blocked by the Channels Block feature. Unblock the channel (page 100).
• If you are unable to tune digital channels, check the antenna configuration (page 46). If you are still
unable to tune digital channels, clear all channels from the channel list (page 48) and reprogram
channels into the channel memory (page 47). If you are still unable to tune digital channels, use the
Restore Factory Defaults procedure as described on page 57. Also see “Other problems,” on the next
page.

Closed caption problems

• If the program or video you selected is not closed-captioned, no captions will display on-screen
(page 88).
• If text is not available, a black rectangle may appear on-screen. If this happens, turn off the closed
caption feature (page 88).
• A closed caption signal may not display correctly in the following situations: a) when a videotape has
been dubbed; b) when the signal reception is weak; or c) when the signal reception is nonstandard
(page 88).

Rating Blocking (V-Chip) problems

• If you forget your PIN code: While the PIN code entering screen is displayed, press RECALL four times
within 5 seconds. The PIN code you previously stored will be cleared (page 98).
• The V-Chip feature is available for the U.S. V-Chip system only (page 99).

Check the antenna/cable connections (see Chapter 2).
The station may have broadcast difficulties. Try another channel.
The sound may be muted. Press VOLUME.
If you hear no sound, try setting the MTS feature to Stereo mode (page 90).
Make sure the Speakers function in the Audio Setup menu is set correctly (page 93).
If you are not receiving a second audio program from a known SAP source, make sure the MTS feature is
set to SAP mode (page 90).
• If you hear audio that seems “incorrect” for the program you are watching (such as music or a foreign
language), the SAP mode may be on. Set the MTS feature to STEREO mode (page 90).
• When using an external audio amplifier, if you connect the amplifier to the VAR. AUDIO OUT terminals,
the volume of the TV and amplifier must be set above 0 or you will not hear any sound (page 23).

Make sure the remote control is set to the correct device mode (page 33).
Remove all obstructions between the remote control and the TV.
The remote control batteries may be dead. Replace the batteries (page 33).
Your TV remote control may not operate certain features on your external device. Refer to the owner’s
manual for your other device to determine its available features. If your TV remote control does not
operate a specific feature on another device, use the remote control that came with the device (page 33).
• If the TV still does not act as expected, use the Restore Factory Defaults procedure as described on page
57.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_112-117_4250HPX95

113
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:48 AM

113

Chapter 12: Troubleshooting

General troubleshooting (continued)
Symptom

Solution

Recording problems

• If you use the TV’s remote control to start recording, you will not be able to change inputs (page 72),
open the POP window (page 81), or open the FAV SCAN multi-window (page 83). If you attempt to do
so, the message “Not Available While Recording” will appear on-screen.
• If you are recording a digital channel, you will only be able to change analog channels while the recording
is in progress. If you are recording an analog channel, you will only be able to change digital channels
while the recording is in progress. This is because the TV tuner that is being recorded (digital or analog)
will be locked on the channel that is currently recording.
• It is recommended that you use the TV’s remote control to start recording. If you use a device other than
the TV’s remote control to start recording and then attempt to access a feature that is normally denied
during recording (POP mode, FAV SCAN mode, changing inputs,) the recorded audio and/or video may
not be what you intended to record. See pages 72 and 76.
• If you connected a Symbio™ AVHD recorder, in order to use its full functionality, you must first set up the
TV Guide On Screen™ system (page 26 and Chapter 5).

TV stops responding to controls

• If the TV stops responding to the controls on the remote control or TV side panel and you cannot turn off
the TV, press and hold the POWER button on the TV side panel for 5 or more seconds to reset the TV.

Other problems

• If your TV’s problem has not been addressed in this Troubleshooting section or the recommended
solution has not worked, use the Restore Factory Defaults procedure as described on page 57.

Cannot connect to network.

• Check modem and splitter connections.
• Make sure the splitter is connected to the modem or telephone.
• Confirm modem’s operation with this manual.
• Make sure your network address or Email account are set correctly (page 107).

Disable network connection

• Check the RJ-45 cable connection.
• Check that the modem’s power cord is plugged in.
• Make sure your network address or Email account are set correctly (page 107).

Unstable network connection.

• Unplug the RJ-45 cable from an outlet, and then connect again.

Cannot set recording timer by Email.

• Select “Test” to confirm the setup( page 107).
• Select “Done” after setting up( page 107).
• See Chapter 11 in this manual.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

114
#01E_112-117_4250HPX95

114
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:48 AM

Chapter 12: Troubleshooting

TV Guide On Screen™ FAQs
The following are frequently asked questions about the TV Guide On Screen™ system. The answers represent the most likely solutions to the
problem.
After you set up the TV Guide On Screen™ system (Chapter 5), the
program guide opens automatically by default when you turn on
the TV. You can turn off the automatic program guide (see page 45)
and instead press the TV GUIDE button on the remote control to
manually open the TV Guide On Screen™ program guide.

7. Q: I had a power outage. Do I need to go through initial
setup of the TV Guide On Screen™ system again?
A: No. The information you entered is stored in the TV Guide
On Screen™ system memory.
Note: For Cable box users, the TV must be OFF and the Cable
box must be left ON for the TV Guide On Screen™ system to
receive channel line-up information.

SETUP
1. Q: What if I move and my ZIP code or postal code
changes?
A: Highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight
Change System Settings (page 70), and then press ENTER.
Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new information
(see Chapter 3 for details). It can take up to 24 hours to
receive new data.
2. Q: What if I change my cable hook-up to antenna or vice
versa?
A: Highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight
Change System Settings (page 70), and then press ENTER.
Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new input
information and rescan channels for the new input (see
Chapter 3 for details).
3. Q: What if I change cable boxes?
A: Highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight
Change System Settings (page 70), and then press ENTER.
Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new input
information and rescan channels for the new input (see
Chapter 3 for details).
4. Q: I used to have a cable box, but now I get direct cable.
What do I do?
A: Highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight
Change System Settings (page 70), and then press ENTER.
Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new input
information and rescan channels for the new input (see
Chapter 3 for details).
5. Q: If I add a recorder or change my cable service, how do I
change my Setup information?
A: Highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight
Change System Settings (page 70), and then press ENTER.
Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new information
(see Chapter 3 for details). It can take up to 24 hours to
receive new data.
6. Q: Why does it take up to 24 hours for the TV Guide
On Screen™ system to be ready for use?
A: The initial setup process consists of finding the stations in
your area that carry the TV Guide On Screen™ system data
and tuning to those stations to receive the setup and
listings data.

8. Q: How do I connect the G-LINK™ (IR blaster) cable to
the G-LINK™ input on the TV?
A: See “Chapter 2: Connecting your TV” in this manual.
You also can refer to the TV Guide On Screen™ prompts
during VCR or Cable box setup.
9. Q: When will I be able to view my TV program listings and
use other TV Guide On Screen™ system features?
A: You will be able to use initial program listings within 24
hours of initial setup. It may take up to one week to receive
the full eight days of program listings.
10. Q: What should I do if I cannot complete initial setup?
A: If you are unable to complete initial setup using the owner’s
manual and the on-screen prompts, please call Toshiba’s
National Service Division at 1-800-631-3811.
11. Q: If I make a mistake during setup, how do I go back to
the previous step?
A: Complete the remaining setup steps. When “Confirming
Your Settings” appears, select “No, repeat setup process.”
Follow the on-screen prompts and input the correct
information.
12. Q: What if the channel number is not visible on my cable
box?
A: Your cable box may be defaulting to a clock or time display
once the channel changes. Watch the box carefully when
testing the cable box brand code to see if the channel
changes to 09.
13. Q: Why won’t my VCR turn on?
A: There are several possibilities:
a) An incorrect or “no VCR” code was entered during the
TV Guide On Screen™ initial setup. Press GUIDE on the
remote control, and then press • to highlight SETUP. Press
z to highlight “Change system settings,” and then press
ENTER. Follow the on-screen prompts to select the correct
VCR information.
b) Make sure the G-LINK™ (IR blaster) cable is connected
correctly (see page 28).
c) The VCR record timer is on. Turn off the timer.
d) The wired remote VCR is incompatible.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_112-117_4250HPX95

115
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:49 AM

115

Chapter 12: Troubleshooting

TV Guide On Screen™ FAQs (continued)
CHANNEL LINEUPS & LISTINGS
14. Q: Why aren’t all my channels initially displayed?
A: After initial setup, approximately 120 channels are
automatically displayed. The user may use the “Change
channel display” feature to turn ON or OFF additional
channels.
Note: Even though you have the option of enabling many
more channels, the system may not have the memory capacity
to hold detailed program descriptions for all of them.

15. Q: When I opened the TV Guide On Screen™ system, I was
asked to choose from more than one channel lineup.
What should I do?
A: Select the lineup that most closely matches the one for your
area. If after you choose the lineup, you want to make
changes to it, highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to
select Change Channel Display. Follow the on-screen
instructions.
16. Q: Why do all my channels display “No Listing?”
A: The TV Guide On Screen™ system has not yet received its
data download. The phrase “No Listing” will be replaced
with program information during the next download cycle,
which will occur within the next 24-hour period.
17. Q: Why do some of my channels display “No Listing?”
A: There are several possibilities:
a) The channels in question were recently turned ON (in
Change channel display) and TV Guide On Screen™ has
yet to receive its next data download.
b) After completing the initial setup, the first data download
of the day was interrupted by a VCR recording.
c) The TV power cord was left unplugged for an extended
period of time and the TV Guide On Screen™ system was
unable to receive program listings during the scheduled
download cycle.
d) Poor reception caused some of the data to be missed.
e) The cable box was turned OFF. The TV power cord must
be plugged in and the cable box must be ON.
g) A/V Cable: The VCR was turned OFF. If the connection
includes stereo cables with cable box to VCR and stereo
connection from VCR to television, the VCR must be ON.
18. Q: A show entry in the TV Guide On Screen™ system reads
“No Listing.” What does that mean?
A: Show information for that entry was not available during
the last TV Guide On Screen™ system information update
(download). Show information is updated on a daily basis.
19. Q: I have seen the word “download” in reference to the
TV Guide On Screen system. What does that mean?
A: “Download” refers to the times throughout the day when
the TV Guide On Screen™ system is receiving channel and
listings information from your Cable or over-the-air
antenna transmission.

20. Q: After some show titles, I have noticed from 1 to 4 stars
(****). What does that mean?
A: These stars are a broadcast-industry ratings system used to
inform you of a show’s quality. The more stars, the better
the rating.
21. Q: What do the colors for shows in the Listings and Search
screens indicate?
A: Green = Sports; Dark Blue = Children’s; Purple = Movies;
Teal = Other Show.
22. Q: How do I add, delete, or change the assigned number of
channels on the TV Guide On Screen™ system?
A: See the “Change channel display” section in the TV Guide
On Screen™ owner’s manual (see page 70).
23. Q: Why are some of my channels listed on the wrong
number?
A: There are several possibilities (see page 70 for details):
a) Incorrect channel lineup was selected. Access “Change
system settings” and choose “Yes, but my channel lineup is
incorrect,” and then reselect the correct lineup.
b) Channel lineup changes have not yet been processed. Use
the “Change channel display” feature to make adjustments.
c) Initial setup was done incorrectly (that is, the wrong
ZIP/postal code was entered). Redo the initial setup.
24. Q: Why doesn’t the program highlighted match up with
the video window on my TV screen?
A: There are several possibilities (see page 70 for details):
a) The station in question made a late change to its scheduled
program listing and the TV Guide On Screen™ system has
not yet been updated.
b) The TV is receiving broadcasts through a modified or
boosted antenna system or a satellite dish (not supported
by the TV Guide On Screen™ system).
c) Initial setup was done incorrectly. (i.e., the wrong
ZIP/postal code was entered.) Redo the initial setup.
d) Incorrect channel lineup was selected. Access “Change
system settings” and choose “Yes, but my channel lineup
is incorrect,” and then reselect the correct lineup.)
e) The video window may be locked. Press SPLIT to unlock.
25. Q: Can I move my favorite stations to the top of the
TV Guide On Screen™ display screen?
A: Yes. Use the “Change channel display” feature to make
adjustments (see page 70). Highlight the station call letters
to be moved, then use the BLUE, GREEN, and/or
Number buttons to reassign the position of the station.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

116
#01E_112-117_4250HPX95

116
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:49 AM

Chapter 12: Troubleshooting

TV Guide On Screen™ FAQs (continued)
OPERATIONS
26. Q: How can I look for a specific show in the TV Guide
On Screen™ system?
A: SEARCH lets you find shows by keyword, alphabetically,
or by category (HDTV, Movies, Sports, Children,
Educational, News, Variety, Series).
27. Q: My cable box will not change channels with the
TV Guide On Screen™ system. What’s wrong?
A: There are several possibilities:
a) The incorrect cable box code was entered during TV Guide
On Screen™ initial setup. Redo initial setup.
b) The G-LINK™ (IR blaster) cable may not be connected
properly (see page 28).
c) The cable box has no remote capability and is
incompatible.
28. Q: How do I resize or close the Info window?
A: Press the INFO button on the remote control to resize the
Info window. Press the INFO button again to close the
Info window.
29. Q: Is there a way to go directly to the next day’s listings
without scrolling through each time slot?
A: Yes. In LISTINGS, highlight the station for which you
want to look ahead and use the Channel Number buttons
on the remote control to enter “24.” In the resulting menu,
press z two times to scroll down to select the HOURS
AHEAD option, and then press ENTER. You also can use
the SKIP button on the remote control.
30. Q: Why can’t I record a show? All I get is snow or a blue
screen.
A: There are several possibilities (without a cable box):
a) The recording unit was not connected or set up correctly.
b) The incorrect channel lineup was selected. Press TV
GUIDE and then • to highlight SETUP. Press z to
highlight “Change system settings,” and then press
ENTER. Follow the on-screen prompts to select the correct
channel lineup.
31. Q: Why won’t my VCR change channels and why does it
change to the wrong channel?
A: There are two possibilities (with a cable box):
a) The VCR is not set on the correct output channel. Set the
VCR to 03, 04, or whichever output channel is set by your
cable system.
b) The VCR and/or cable box are hooked up incorrectly.
Refer to your VCR owner’s manual or contact your Cable
TV company for proper wiring procedures.

32. Q: Is Help available in the TV Guide On Screen™ system?
If so, how do I find it?
A: Yes. Highlight any of the five main Services (Listings,
Schedule, Recordings, Setup, Search) and press INFO on
the remote control. An expanded Info Box displays
additional help information. Press INFO again to close the
box.
Help is also available in a panel menu. Press INFO to
display an expanded Info Box. Press INFO again to close
the box.
RECORD/REMIND
33. Q: Can I tune to a different channel while recording a
program?
A: No.
34. Q: How many programs can be scheduled for RECORD in
the GUIDE?
A: There is no limit to the number of shows that can be
programmed into the schedule memory.
35. Q: If a program is scheduled to RECORD on a Regular
basis, does it count as five?
A: No, whether a program is scheduled ONCE,
REGULARLY, or WEEKLY, it only counts as one show in
the RECORD stack memory.
36. Q: If I have a power failure, will I need to reset the
recorded shows I have already programmed?
A: The start times and channel numbers of shows that have
been programmed will be retained in the memory of the
TV Guide On Screen™ system. Titles will appear once
listings are restored.
37. Q: Can I set a Record or Remind event without
highlighting a show title in the TV Guide On Screen™
system?
A: Yes. TV Guide On Screen™ has a Manual Record and
Remind feature. Highlight SCHEDULE in the Service Bar,
and press MENU. Choose the event type, press ENTER,
and then enter the date, start and stop time, channel
number, and so forth.
38. Q: What do the frequencies for Record and Remind mean?
A: Once—records/reminds the show one time.
Daily (manual only)—records/reminds the time, channel,
input, recorder combination Monday through Friday.
Regularly— records/reminds the show every time the show
airs on the same channel and starts at the same time.
Weekly— records/reminds the show each time the show
airs on the same day of the week, on the same channel and
starts at the same time.
Off (not cancel)—keeps the show in the Schedule list but
will not record/remind the show until the frequency is
changed.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_112-117_4250HPX95

117
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:49 AM

117

13

Appendix

Specifications
NOTE: • This model complies with the specifications listed below.
• Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice.
• This model may not be compatible with features and/or specifications that may be added in the future.
Television System
NTSC standard
ATSC standard (8VSB)
Digital Cable (64 QAM, 256 QAM; in-the-clear, unencrypted*)
*Encrypted channels can be viewed on this TV
using a CableCARD.™ See page 15 for details.

Channel Coverage
VHF: 2 through 13
UHF: 14 through 69
Cable TV: Mid band (A-8 through A-1, A through I)
Super band (J through W)
Hyper band (AA through ZZ, AAA, BBB)
Ultra band (65 through 94, 100 through 135)
Power Source
120 V AC, 60 Hz
Power Consumption
42HPX95: 337 W (average)
57 W in standby mode (Using a CableCARD™)
53 W in standby mode (Without a CableCARD™)
50HPX95: 407 W (average)
57 W in standby mode (Using a CableCARD™)
53 W in standby mode (Without a CableCARD™)
Audio Power
10 W + 10 W
Speaker Type
Main: Four 2-3/8 × 4-3/4 inches (60 × 120 mm)
Tweeter: Two 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) round
Video/Audio Terminals
S-VIDEO INPUT:
Y : 1 V(p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync.
C : 0.286 V(p-p) (burst signal), 75 ohm
VIDEO/AUDIO INPUT:
VIDEO: 1 V(p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync.
AUDIO: 150 mV(rms) (30% modulation equivalent,
22 k ohm or greater)
ColorStream® (component video) HD INPUT:
Y : 1V(p-p), 75 ohm
PR: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 ohm
PB : 0.7 V(p-p), 75 ohm
AUDIO: 150 mV(rms), 22 k ohm or greater
Suggested formats: 1080i, 480p, 480i, 720p
NOTE: This TV does not provide ColorStream HD OUTPUT.

HDMI™ INPUT:
HDMI compliant (type A connector)
HDCP compliant
E-EDID** compliant
Suggested formats: 1080i, 480p, 480i, 720p
HDMI Audio: 2-channel PCM; 32/44.1/48 kHz sampling
frequency; 16/20/24 bits per sample

Video/Audio Terminals (continued)
PC INPUT:
15-pin D-sub Analog RGB
PC AUDIO INPUT:
3.5 mm stereo mini jack
VIDEO/AUDIO OUTPUT (also for recording):
VIDEO: 1 V(p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync.
AUDIO: 150 mV(rms) (30% modulation equivalent,
2.2 k ohm or less)
VARIABLE AUDIO OUTPUT:
0–300 mV(rms) (30% modulation equivalent,
2.2 k ohm or less)
G-LINK™ and IR INPUT/OUTPUT:
3 V(p-p), 3.5 mm mono socket (IR blaster cables supplied)
IEEE1394 INPUT/OUTPUT:
IEEE1394 compliant 4-pin
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT:
Optical type
Headphone jack:
3.5 mm stereo
RJ-45 port:
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
Dimensions
42HPX95: Width: 43-3/8 inches (1100 mm)
Height: 30-3/4 inches (778 mm)
Depth: 15-3/8 inches (390 mm)
50HPX95: Width: 49-5/8 inches (1258 mm)
Height: 34-5/8 inches (877 mm)
Depth: 15-3/8 inches (390 mm)
Weight
42HPX95: 117.3 lbs (53.0 kg)
50HPX95: 142.6 lbs (64.7 kg)
Supplied Accessories
• Two dual-wand IR blaster cables
• Remote control with two size “AA” alkaline batteries
• Power cord (three wire grounding type)
• Clip (see item 19 on page 3)
• Owner’s Manual (This book)

NOTE: This TV does not provide HDMI OUTPUT.

_________
** E-EDID = Enhanced-Extended Display Identification
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

118
#01E_118-123_4250HPX95

118
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:50 AM

Chapter 13: Appendix

Limited United States Warranty
for Plasma Televisions
Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C. (“TACP”) makes the following
limited warranties to original consumers in the United States. THESE
LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER
PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS PLASMA
TELEVISION AS A GIFT FROM THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER
PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE.
PLASMA TELEVISIONS PURCHASED IN THE U.S.A. AND USED
ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, CANADA AND MEXICO, ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE
WARRANTIES.
PLASMA TELEVISIONS PURCHASED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF THE
U.S.A., INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA AND MEXICO,
AND USED IN THE U.S.A., ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE
WARRANTIES.
Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Parts and Labor
TACP warrants this Plasma Television and its parts against defects in
materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the date of
original retail purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, AT TACP’S
OPTION, REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR
REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU FOR PARTS OR
LABOR. During this period, TACP Authorized Service Station personnel will
come to your home when warranty service is required. Depending on the
type of repair required, the service will either be performed in your home or
the Plasma Television will be taken to a TACP Authorized Service Station for
repair and returned to your home at no cost to you.
Rental Units
The warranty for Plasma Television rental units begins on the date of the first
rental or thirty (30) days after the date of shipment to the rental firm,
whichever comes first.
Limited Warranty for Commercial Units
TACP warrants Plasma Televisions that are sold and used for commercial
purposes as follows: all parts are warranted against defects in materials or
workmanship for a period of ninety (90) days after the date of original retail
purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, AT TACP’S OPTION,
REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR
REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU.
Owner’s Manual and Product Registration Card
Read this owner’s manual thoroughly before operating this Plasma Television.
Complete and mail the enclosed product registration card or register your
Plasma Television online at www.tacp.toshiba.com/service as soon as
possible. By registering your Plasma Television you will enable TACP to bring
you new products specifically designed to meet your needs and help us to
contact you in the unlikely event a safety notification is required under the
U.S. Consumer Product Safety Act. Failure to complete and return the
product registration card does not diminish your warranty rights.
Your Responsibility
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING
CONDITIONS:
(1) You must retain your original bill of sale or provide other proof of
purchase.
(2) All warranty servicing of this Plasma Television must be performed by an
Authorized TACP Service Station.
(3) The warranties from TACP are effective only if this Plasma Television is
purchased and operated in the Continental U.S.A. or Puerto Rico.

(4) Labor service charges for set installation, setup, adjustment of customer
controls, and installation or repair of antenna systems are not covered
by this warranty. Reception problems caused by inadequate antenna
systems, misaligned satellite dishes, cable television distribution, VCRs,
DVD players/recorders, personal computer level IEEE1394 devices, and
any other connected signal source device are your responsibility.
(5) Warranties extend only to defects in materials or workmanship as limited
above, and do not extend to any Plasma Television or parts that have
been lost or discarded by you or to damage to the Plasma Television or
parts caused by fires, misuse, accident, Acts of God (such as lightning
or fluctuations in electric power), improper installation, improper
maintenance, or use in violation of instructions furnished by TACP; use
or malfunction through simultaneous use of this Plasma Television and
connected equipment; or to units that have been modified or had the
serial number removed, altered, defaced, or rendered illegible.
How to Obtain Warranty Service
If, after following all of the operating instructions in this manual and reviewing
the section entitled “Troubleshooting,” you find that service is needed:
(1) To find the nearest TACP Authorized Service Station, visit TACP’s
website at www.tacp.toshiba.com/service or contact TACP’s
Consumer Solution Center toll free at 1-800-631-3811.
(2) You must present your original bill of sale or other proof of purchase to
the TACP Authorized Service Station.
For additional information, visit TACP’s website:
www.tacp.toshiba.com
ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE
U.S.A., INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE LIMITED
WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY
WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE U.S.A. AS
HEREBY LIMITED, THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND
IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES, AGREEMENTS,
AND SIMILAR OBLIGATIONS OF TACP WITH RESPECT TO THE
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY PARTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL
TACP BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION, OR MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF RECORDED
DATA CAUSED BY USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS
PLASMA TELEVISION).
No person, agent, distributor, dealer, or company is authorized to change,
modify, or extend the terms of these warranties in any manner whatsoever.
The time within which an action must be commenced to enforce any
obligation of TACP arising under the warranty or under any statute or law of
the United States or any state thereof is hereby limited to ninety (90) days
from the date you discover, or should have discovered, the defect. This
limitation does not apply to implied warranties arising under the law of any
state of the U.S.A.
THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY
ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE
IN THE U.S.A. SOME STATES OF THE U.S.A. DO NOT ALLOW
LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY, WHEN
AN ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT, OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION
OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. THEREFORE, THE
ABOVE PROVISIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU UNDER SUCH
CIRCUMSTANCES.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_118-123_4250HPX95

119
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:50 AM

119

Chapter 13: Appendix

Limited Canada Warranty
for Plasma Televisions
Toshiba Canada Limited (“TCL”) makes the following limited warranties to
original consumers in Canada. THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND
TO THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON
RECEIVING THIS PLASMA TELEVISION AS A GIFT FROM THE
ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER
PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE.
PLASMA TELEVISIONS PURCHASED IN CANADA AND USED
ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF CANADA, INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, THE U.S.A. AND MEXICO, ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE
WARRANTIES.
PLASMA TELEVISIONS PURCHASED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF
CANADA, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE U.S.A. AND
MEXICO, AND USED IN CANADA, ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE
WARRANTIES.
Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Parts and Labor
TCL warrants this Plasma Television and its parts against defects in materials
or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the date of original retail
purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TCL WILL, AT TCL’S OPTION, REPAIR
OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED
PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU FOR PARTS OR LABOR. During this
period, TCL Authorized Service Depot personnel will come to your home
when warranty service is required. Depending on the type of repair required,
the service will either be performed in your home or the Plasma Television
will be taken to a TCL Authorized Service Depot for repair and returned to
your home at no cost to you. IN-HOME SERVICE ONLY APPLIES WITHIN
100 KILOMETERS OF AN AUTHORIZED TCL SERVICE DEPOT.
Rental Units
The warranty for Plasma Television rental units begins on the date of the first
rental or thirty (30) days after the date of shipment to the rental firm,
whichever comes first.
Limited Warranty for Commercial Units
TCL warrants Plasma Televisions that are sold and used for commercial
purposes as follows: all parts are warranted against defects in materials or
workmanship for a period of ninety (90) days after the date of original retail
purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TCL WILL, AT TCL’S OPTION, REPAIR
OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED
PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU. ON-SITE SERVICE ONLY APPLIES
WITHIN 100 KILOMETERS OF AN AUTHORIZED TCL SERVICE DEPOT.
Owner’s Manual and Product Registration
Read this owner’s manual thoroughly before operating this Plasma Television.
Register your Plasma Television online at www.toshiba.ca as soon as
possible. By registering your Plasma Television you will enable TCL to bring
you new products specifically designed to meet your needs and help us to
contact you in the unlikely event a safety notification is required. Failure to
register your Plasma Television does not diminish your warranty rights.
Your Responsibility
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING
CONDITIONS:
(1) You must retain your original bill of sale or provide other proof of
purchase.
(2) All warranty servicing of this Plasma Television must be performed by an
Authorized TCL Service Depot.
(3) The warranties from TCL are effective only if this Plasma Television is
purchased in Canada from an authorized TCL dealer and operated in
Canada.

(4) Labor service charges for set installation, setup, adjustment of customer
controls, and installation or repair of antenna systems are not covered
by this warranty. Reception problems caused by inadequate antenna
systems, misaligned satellite dishes, cable television distribution, VCRs,
DVD players/recorders, personal computer level IEEE-1394 devices,
and any other connected signal source device are your responsibility.
(5) Warranties extend only to defects in materials or workmanship as limited
above, and do not extend to any Plasma Television or parts that have
been lost or discarded by you or to damage to the Plasma Television or
parts caused by fires, misuse, accident, Acts of God (such as lightning
or fluctuations in electric power), improper installation, improper
maintenance, or use in violation of instructions furnished by TCL; use or
malfunction through simultaneous use of this Plasma Television and
connected equipment; or to units that have been modified or had the
serial number removed, altered, defaced, or rendered illegible.
How to Obtain Warranty Service
If, after following all of the operating instructions in this manual and reviewing
the section entitled “Troubleshooting,” you find that service is needed:
(1) To find the nearest TCL Authorized Service Depot, visit TCL’s website at
www.toshiba.ca.
(2) You must present your original bill of sale or other proof of purchase to
the TCL Authorized Service Depot.
For additional information, visit TCL’s website:
www.toshiba.ca
ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY PROVINCE OF
CANADA, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE LIMITED
WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY
WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY PROVINCE OF CANADA
AS HEREBY LIMITED, THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE
AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES,
AGREEMENTS, AND SIMILAR OBLIGATIONS OF TCL WITH RESPECT
TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY PARTS. IN NO EVENT
SHALL TCL BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF
RECORDED DATA CAUSED BY USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE
THIS PLASMA TELEVISION).
No person, agent, distributor, dealer, or company is authorized to change,
modify, or extend the terms of these warranties in any manner whatsoever.
The time within which an action must be commenced to enforce any
obligation of TCL arising under the warranty or under any law of Canada or
any province thereof is hereby limited to ninety (90) days from the date you
discover, or should have discovered, the defect. This limitation does not
apply to implied warranties arising under the law of any province of Canada.
THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY
ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM PROVINCE TO
PROVINCE IN CANADA. SOME PROVINCES OF CANADA DO NOT
ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN IMPLIED
WARRANTY, WHEN AN ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT, OR THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES. THEREFORE, THE ABOVE PROVISIONS MAY NOT APPLY
TO YOU UNDER SUCH CIRCUMSTANCES.
[0705]

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

120
#01E_118-123_4250HPX95

120
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:50 AM

Chapter 13: Appendix

A copy of the GPL source code in this product may be obtained by
contacting Toshiba Consumer Solutions at (800)631-3811. There will be a
charge to cover the costs of providing the source code.
A copy of the LGPL source code in this product may be obtained by
contacting Toshiba Consumer Solutions at (800)631-3811. There will be a
charge to cover the costs of providing the source code.
USB Protocol Copyright © 2005 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights
reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of The NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specified prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC.
AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in
the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org).
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com).
OpenSSL 0.9.7d Copyright © 1998-2000 the OpenSSL Project. All Rights
reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software
developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(http://openssl.org).
4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “Open SSL Project” must not be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior
written permission. For written permission, please contact opensslcore@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may
“Open SSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the
OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
acknowledgement: “This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org).”

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND
ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes
cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This
product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). All Rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with
Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use
so long as the following conditions are adhered to. The following conditions
apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES,
etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this
distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is
Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the
code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric
Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library
used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in
documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgement: “This product includes
cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).” The
word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the routines from the library being
used are not cryptographic related.
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or derivative thereof) from the
apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
“This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptosoft.com).”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The license and distribution terms for
any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed,
i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution
license (including the GNU Public License).

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_118-123_4250HPX95

121
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:50 AM

121

Chapter 13: Appendix

Note

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

122
#01E_118-123_4250HPX95

122
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:50 AM

Chapter 13: Appendix

Note

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_118-123_4250HPX95

123
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:51 AM

123

Index
A

EFGHIJ

Antenna cables ........................................................................................12
Audio player ............................................................................................. 89
Audio quality adjustments ................................................................... 87
Audio system connection .....................................................................21
Auto aspect ................................................................................................ 76
Auto power off ......................................................................................... 94
AVHD ................................................................................................... 24, 52

EIA-775 ........................................................................................................24
Email accaunt setup ............................................................................ 106
FAV SCAN button ............................................................................ 46, 80

B
Back of the TV ..........................................................................................11
Blocking channels .................................................................................. 99

C
Cable box connection .....................................................................15, 17
CableCARD™ ............................................................................................13
CableClear® DNR ....................................................................................82
Cables ..........................................................................................................12
Camcorder connection .......................................................................... 14
CH yz buttons ................................................................................ 44, 73
CH RTN button .........................................................................................73
ChannelBrowser™ .......................................................................................
Channel Number buttons ............................................................ 44, 73
Channel programming:
Automatic programming ................................................................ 44
Manually adding and deleting ...................................................... 45
Cinema mode ............................................................................................ 77
Closed captions ...................................................................................... 84
Color management .................................................................................85
Color temperature ...................................................................................82
ColorStream® .................................................................................... 11, 18
Connecting devices ........................................................................ 13–27
CompactFlash® memory cards .................................................. 89, 90
Component video cables .....................................................................12
Component video (ColorStream®) ............................................ 11, 18

D
Device connections ........................................................................ 13–27
Defaults, restore TV factory ............................................................... 54
Digital Audio Out .....................................................................................21
Digital signal meter ............................................................................... 54
DNR (Digital Noise Reduction) ......................................................... 82
Dolby Digital ...................................................................................... 21, 88
Dolby Virtual surround .......................................................................... 92
Double-window POP feature .............................................................. 78
DVD player connection .................................................................. 17, 18
D-VHS .................................................................................................. 24, 52
DVI connection .........................................................................................20
Dynamic Contrast ....................................................................................83

Factory defaults, restore TV ........................................................ 54, 81
Favorite channels ............................................................................ 46, 80
Features, TV ................................................................................................. 8
Focus ........................................................................................................... 88
FREEZE .......................................................................................................XX
Front of the TV ..........................................................................................10
G-LINK™ connection .............................................................................26
GameTimer™ .......................................................................................... 100
Gray level ....................................................................................................95
HDMI™ connection ................................................................................20
Home file server setup ....................................................................... 110
Home Network connection ................................................................ 30
IEEE1394 .....................................................................................................24
INPUT button ........................................................................................... 69
Input lock ................................................................................................... 99
Installation, care, and service .......................................................... 3, 4
Installation, setup ...................................................................................... 9
Integrated digital tuning ......................................................................... 8
IR blaster ....................................................................................................22
JPEG ........................................................................................... 89–92, 110

L
Labeling video inputs ............................................................................ 70
Language selection ................................................................................43
Last mode memory feature ................................................................ 96
LED indications ........................................................................................11
Locking video inputs ............................................................................. 99
LOCKS menu ............................................................................................. 97
Channels, blocking ........................................................................... 99
Enable rating blocking .................................................................... 98
GameTimer™ ..................................................................................... 100
New PIN code ..................................................................................... 97
Unlocking programs temporarily ................................................ 99
Video inputs, locking ....................................................................... 99
Long life ..................................................................................................... 94

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

124
#01E_124-125_4250HPX95

124
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:51 AM

Index (continued)
M

S

Memory cards ................................................................................... 89–92
Memory Stick™ memory cards .................................................. 89, 90
Menu system ...................................................................................... 37, 38
MMC memory cards ...................................................................... 89, 90
MP3 ....................................................................................................... 90–92
MPEG-2 digital video signals .............................................................23
MPEG Noise Reduction ........................................................................ 83
MTS feature .............................................................................................. 86
MUTE button ............................................................................................ 86

Safety, care, installation, and service ........................................... 2–4
SAP sound ................................................................................................. 86
Satellite receiver connection ..............................................................16
Scrolling the TheaterWide® picture .................................................. 76
SD (Secure Digital™) memory cards ....................................... 89, 90
Service ........................................................................................................... 4
Setup, TV ............................................................................................. 38, 43
Setup, TV Guide On Screen™ system ............................................. 39
Side panel ........................................................................................... 10, 38
Sleep timer .................................................................................................93
Speakers ON/OFF .................................................................................. 88
Specifications ......................................................................................... 107
SRS 3D ....................................................................................................... 88
SRS WOW™ .............................................................................................. 88
StableSound® ............................................................................................ 87
Stereo sound ............................................................................................ 86
S-video cables ..........................................................................................12
Symbio™ AVHD recorder ............................................................. 24, 52
System status ........................................................................................... 54

OP
ON/OFF timer ...........................................................................................93
Optical audio cable ................................................................................12
Panel lock ................................................................................................ 100
PC connection .......................................................................................... 27
PC setting .................................................................................................. 94
Picture adjustments:
Color temperature ..............................................................................82
Picture mode ....................................................................................... 81
Picture quality ..................................................................................... 81
Picture-out-picture (POP):
FAV SCAN button .............................................................................. 80
SPLIT button ......................................................................................... 78
Picture scroll .............................................................................................. 76
Picture size selection .............................................................................75
Picture viewer .......................................................................................... 89
Problems with TV ........................................................................ 101-103

R
RECALL button ....................................................................................... 86
Remote control:
Battery installation ............................................................................ 30
Device code table ...................................................................... 35, 36
Effective range .....................................................................................29
Functional key chart .................................................................. 31, 32
Learning about the buttons ................................................... 28, 29
Operational feature reset ............................................................... 34
Programming .......................................................................................33
Searching and sampling the code .............................................. 33
Volume lock feature ..........................................................................35
Restore TV factory defaults ................................................................ 54
Reverse ........................................................................................................95
RJ-45 ............................................................................................................13

T
TheaterNet™ DEVICE and CONTROL buttons ........................... 48
TheaterNet™ control ..............................................................................22
TheaterNet™ setup ................................................................................. 47
TheaterWide® picture size ...................................................................75
THINC™ system .......................................................................................13
Time and date setting ............................................................................52
Troubleshooting ........................................................................... 101-103
TruBass ....................................................................................................... 88
TV Guide On Screen™ .............................................................. 9, 39, 55

V
V-Chip blocking (Locks menu) .................................................. 97–99
VCR connection ............................................................................... 14–19
Video cables ..............................................................................................12
Video input labels ................................................................................... 70
Video input lock ...................................................................................... 99

W, X
Warranty:
U.S ......................................................................................................... 108
Canada ................................................................................................ 109
White ............................................................................................................95
WOW™, SRS® .............................................................................................................................................................. 88
xD-Picture Card™ ............................................................................ 89, 90

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_124-125_4250HPX95

125
Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

7/12/05, 9:51 AM

125

TOSHIBA AMERICA CONSUMER PRODUCTS, L.L.C.
HEAD OFFICE: 82 TOTOWA ROAD, WAYNE, NJ 07470, U.S.A.
NATIONAL SERVICE DIVISION:1420-B TOSHIBA DRIVE, LEBANON, TN 37087, U.S.A.

TOSHIBA OF CANADA LTD.
HEAD OFFICE: 191 McNABB STREET, MARKHAM, ONTARIO, L3R 8H2, CANADA – TEL: (905) 470-5400
SERVICE CENTERS:
TORONTO: 191 McNABB STREET, MARKHAM, ONTARIO L3R 8H2, CANADA – TEL: (905) 470- 5400
MONTREAL: 18050 TRANS CANADA, KIRKLAND, QUEBEC, H9J 4A1, CANADA – TEL: (514) 390-7766
VANCOUVER: 22171 FRASERWOOD WAY, RICHMOND, B.C., V6W 1J5, CANADA – TEL: (604) 303-2500

MANUFACTURED BY

CableClear, CinemaSeries, ColorStream, StableSound, and TheaterWide are registered trademarks of Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.
ChannelBrowser, GameTimer, SurfLock, Symbio, and TheaterNet are trademarks of Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.

PRINTED IN USA
(05-07)

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

#01E_126_4250HPX95

126
Black

7/12/05, 9:51 AM



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 126
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-14, framework 1.6
About                           : uuid:281f65c3-2ba1-11da-9563-000d936ee1b0
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 for Macintosh
Create Date                     : 2005:07:12 10:02:40+09:00
Modify Date                     : 2005:09:22 15:43:32-04:00
Metadata Date                   : 2005:09:22 15:43:32-04:00
Creator Tool                    : PageMaker 6.5
Document ID                     : uuid:bc269e5f-7942-492c-8b15-4da8bf886373
Instance ID                     : uuid:1031daea-4492-4a8f-b77f-53e2432ab707
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : 
Title                           : 
Author                          : 

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools